Home

Asset Manager

1. M 93 Evento PIU eh erdt on cba e ner o dun Oben id tinca 95 i Ar SS dct RAR cf PEG Wess or A ATR o Y QrQ al PaA DBA AAAF a A A An AAN il a A 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin X 78755 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 WWwW rfcode co RF COD Ore E A ents or er em Renee ees er etter EE Ore re E on re E er ree eer ere E ere 93 Boy apcltabeaha alah EE eter Tee E A ee eer 95 CT VSL CON NE M 101 TS e HSU a A PP A 101 De Event a enis NR 101 leves Roto PA OP UA O O 102 cc nada bounce H 102 Homme lso o e osea tube Mn meer ome er ne ONU TUORUM en ON 102 Cop me rca TO as ans 104 Diana ca APS e o o E E 104 Lil O 105 Pda E C c mM M 105 FENCE FNCU ONS e 106 OF E oic MEOS M 106 ConHeumne e A een dedic neci eee ne err renee ree eer TT eer oru eld ubud dede ie ped a rrr errr 107 Op le COS rch erie eet eh O UD 110 Teano Mec ACOSO por phe 110 Boa ato A E o A o uo A 110 o E o E o 110 Creatine alert T reso Sunat eri ninas teen neon 111 Contento Men bros not saciar terrence err trie Metre ene tr Tr tere rrr err terre ren Ctr 112 CoD 1p SERE THEESDOLGS AO nent areca o O 113 Doe
2. 199 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Authentication enter the User ID and Password for the SPM server Data Refresh Rates select the CDU Refresh Period and CDU List Refresh Period et Asset Manager Administration Readers Eo a Ls B9 vv G cor 9 paete 9 new Folder e 9 o x Su Dashboard E Filter Reader S Configuration La E E Basic Information 3 Database dal 10 1 31 10 Name bem thing bens T License Keys E Zone Manager Local Zone Manager y 1 SMTP Server x Blargh Offine m iC Demo Reader Disable Description 4 Import Configuration dak OC Demo Reader Disablec x EX Export Configuration 9 Jim s TEST Reader Offiine Enabled E amp Tag Groups Imi PDU Demo Reader IE Sensor Definitions kal PDU Demo Reader2 M enge llo caia Imi PDU Demo Reader3 Hostname 66 214 208 101 fly Zone Manager Status kal PDU Demo Reader4 Port 80 ial Readers hn Sim hal Reader Firmware dal SPM thing Disabled EN Arcas User ID rfcode uw GPS Password 990990009090000900 9 Serial Devices Confirm Password jslabeosussetes IJ Server Data Refresh Rates CDU Refresh Period 60 seconds CDU List Refresh Period 600 seconds Status Reader State Next go to the Configuration gt Tag Groups task in the Administrator Console and add the SPMCDU tag group The PDU Asset Types should populate auto
3. lt attribute guids ReportStartTime type timestamp gt lt name gt Start Time lt name gt lt attribute gt lt attribute guids ReportStopTime types timestamp lt name gt Stop Time lt name gt lt attribute gt lt attribute guid faName type string gt lt nane gt Nane lt name gt lt descr ipt ionoName lt descr ipt ton gt lt attribute gt lt attribute quide zReaderNoiseA types long units dbm gt lt name gt Noise Floor Channel A lt name gt descriptions Current measured noise floor for channel A in dBm lt description gt lt attribute gt lt attribute guids zReaderNoiseB type long units dbm gt name Noise Floor Channel B lt name gt lt description gt Current measured noise floor for channel B in dBm lt description gt attribute lt attributes gt ow ts val 20808 11 20T15 00 52 ts val ts val 2008 11 20T15 01 32 ts val string val Rack Reader 12 lt string val gt lt long val gt 8 lt long val gt Deleting Reports To delete a report select a report from the list and then click the Delete button NOTE Deleting a report does not delete the output of other reports that have already been run nor does deleting a report definition template which only deletes the template definition 145 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD Graphs Graphs
4. 10 Click the Attribute button 11 Select the Purchase Date from the attributes list and then click OK 12 Repeat these steps again for the day component of the date function After completing these steps the function should appear like the following date year PURCHASE DATE month PURCHASE DATE day PURCHASE DATE TIP Alternatively instead of using the Attribute button you can simply type the attribute exactly as it appears above for each time section 13 Adda one 1 to the year component of the date function in order to represent a one year warranty to complete the formula by placing the cursor after the closed parentheses of the year PURCHASE DATE parameter and type 1 The expression will now look like date year PURCHASE DATE 1 month PURCHASE DATE day PURCHASE DATE 14 Review the expression a final time to ensure that all parentheses are opened and closed properly as necessary for any regular mathematical function in order for the expression to calculate the correct data 15 Click the Save Changes button After you create a Calculated Asset Attribute you need to apply it to an Asset Type To apply an Attribute to an Asset Type perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Asset Tag in the Asset Types list in the Asset Types Sub Task The Attributes screen for Asset Tag will appear 2 Under the Attribute box click the Add button and select the Calculated Asset Attribute that you just created c
5. 154 B aede su 154 Dsne Achion sth Reports qud CH3DDS ects op totes e ss inibi breve ar ctvn ti iibi eir di RH pass tn vend Di v vas cerned iia aaa 155 Configuring Email Actions for Reports and Graphs sai ii 155 osaba loser whee FITA cions TOP Repon Aad rap eden ciclo ere enn ee ree Tener entre llenara titan 156 Conticutio HTIP Post Actions for Reports ai Tapas vs Eu ira EP Cei nb en d nios c ENG Und aei o ES 157 je HM 158 er e Dr A M ee 158 rco IP EU 158 Croada and Dose Map TOS 010 Lom een ne mT ree eer a Cee eer wernt eT eee tte Tt Ce ter eer errr eer aaa 160 PNM T H M 163 Dashboard m 165 Bray v OE DENS elo ona career ee mre UnA ee re ee nT ee Ce ee ery er ne ee tT eee ey ne eer ee ere re ee ere ee tre 165 Creatas a Basie Da DO Ad naaa 167 User Accounts and Security Within Asset Man aQce fivicscssscscoscscssstoeticscvesssececabancostencesencsesneocsenepeconebonsccessauuesseseecutsnsesconmscogstsoubmaeee 172 set Accounts Roles Aid Permiso 172 Add IS ARO 172 darlo O copo PNEU 174 Mira Es a P E T T A E E OAT T A E E 175 CCSS E e E E A E O E A E er ee 176 e SS o A RN 178 SS E 179 E Er dk AA E O e o El E EEE E O o 183 cor A A O 18
6. DATE Ds The current date year month day DAY The current day of the month 2 digits FILTER LOCATION The report filter location FILTER TYPE The report asset type HOUR The current hour of the day 2 digits 24 hour ID Report ID JOB ID Report job ID JOB NAME Report job name JOB START TIME Report job start time JOB_STOP_TIME Report job stop time MILLISECOND The current milliseconds of the second 3 digits MINUTE The current minute of the hour 2 digits MONTH The current month 2 digits January 01 NAME Report name SECOND The current second of the minute 2 digits TIME The current time 24 hour hour minute second TIMESTAMP The current time TIMEZONE OFFSET The current offset from GME positive negative digit plus 4 digits TYPE Report type TYPE ID Report type ID YEAR The current year Macros for Events and Alerts Macros provide access to information from two sources The first source is the Event or Alert itself It s common to label the Event or Alert the date or time an event happened or to display the name or description or configuration information from the Event or Alert template definition itself This can be done using the various pre defined macros as seen in the list below The other source of information that macros can use is the source entity for the Event or Alert Because both Events and Alerts are generated from a source entity e g a Reader or a Zone Manager you can use macros to display val
7. NOTE For more information refer to the reader configuration sections RF Code Reader Configuration with the Reader Web Console Adding and Configuring Readers in the Admin Console 2 Add the right IR Tag Groups for your particular IR tags to Asset Manager NOTE For more information on adding Tag Groups refer to the Adding Tag Groups section 3 Configure the IR Locator with its specific locator configuration utility NOTE For more information refer to the user guide for that locator http support rfcode com customer portal articles 722910 4 Associate an IR Rule to a Location in Asset Manager NOTE For mote information refer to the Locations and Rules section 193 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Integrating with PDUs and CDUs Asset Manager can be used to monitor power capacities and usage in data centers with the RF Code line of R170 sensor tags RF Code supports product families of third party power devices from STI Geist Emerson and Schneider Electric APC rather than individual product models As of May 2014 RF Code sells four 4 different R170 sensor tags for various power distribution units PDUs and cabinet power distribution units CDUs manufactured by the following partner companies e ServerTech STI Smart and Switched CDUs with PIPS Per Inlet Power Sensing and with or without POPS Per Outlet Power Sen
8. There are three main areas the widget layout selection pane the dashboard preview pane and the widget settings pane Widgets Layouts Selection Pane E r Widget Settings Pane ia O Dashboard Preview Pane 168 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD In order to begin customization of the dashboard you should first select the Layout type you would like to use This is done by selecting the Blank layout or the Table layout from the Layout tree and dragging and dropping it onto the dashboard preview pane Widgets Layout 3 O Widgets WA Alerts Past Wook A Asset Gra BA Bar Chart WA pa A Graph BA Horizontal Bar 5 LCD Display SA LCD Display With LED IM LED Dial BA Open Alerts IM single LED A System Configuration SA Text Widget A Users Onina A vertical Bar Select Blank or Table and drag to Dashboard Preview Pane Blank Choosing this layout option and dragging it to the Dashboard Preview Pane will place a blank box as the layout for the dashboard The borders of this box can be manipulated by dragging the edges along the width or the height More than one Blank box can be placed on the Dashboard Multiple widgets can be placed in one Blank layout box Blank layout boxes can also be used to create borders or blank spaces in the dash board as well A Blank layout box can be removed from the Dashboard Preview Pane by right clicking and s
9. 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 3 0 The type of the alert which caused the trap Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 4 0 The current state of the alert which caused the trap Integer 32 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 5 0 The configured alert message from the alert threshold Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 6 0 The attribute guid which is the alerting condition from the alert threshold Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 7 0 The attribute value which is the alerting condition from the alert threshold Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 8 0 The severity of the alert Integer32 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 9 0 The alert start time Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 10 0 The alert resolve time if resolved Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 11 0 The alert asset GUID Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 12 0 The number of attributes contained in the attribute table Unsigned Integer 32 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 x x This is the table ID range containing additional alert attribute values 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 1 1 The first attribute value index Unsigned Integer 32 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 1 2 The first attribute value GUID Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 1 3 The first attribute value Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 1 4 The second attribute value index 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 1 5 The second attribute value GUID 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 1 6 The second attribute value 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 20
10. If this happens then the service must be shutdown and the contents of the folder c Program Files RF Code Asset Manager zonemet datadir deleted Start the setvice back up and the local Zone Manager should be online again RF Code Support and Professional Services For additional information about functionality that is not described in this document or is not clear in this document please search the RF Code Support website http support rfcode com and or contact RF Code Support If some feature is not inherent in the system please contact RF Code Professional Services to discuss your specific needs For more information about RF Code Professional Services refer to http www tfcode com Resources professional services html 265 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 2 FCOD WWW rfcode com http support rfcode com 877 969 2828 266
11. P A Catibri 3 EE d Y ge Wrap Text General i Paste 3 U Rn i cad Merge amp Center 49 398 Conditional Format Cell x Formatting as Table Styles Clipboard Ta F Alignment J Number fa Styles 41 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD To configure the file in order to import Assets in bulk perform the following steps 1 Highlight all of the cells and then double click the line between the first two columns to expand all the columns wide enough to read all of the cell values do s opot ALLAL Read Only Maresctt Excel inver Page Larne Pormuis Date Renew Ow n E Calne it AG gt ar Wrap Tee Gener E E m E gt T rapa M Ce gt Conditions Tu Ce mE a M 2 4 VU VU ret Caro 1 61 NA F amattiny a Tabie Styler M a Chem gt A o i Thuntisi 0r 2 Remove all of the columns attributes from the spreadsheet except the following attributes and the values that are present for the Inventory and or Sensor Assets that were exported Class Type Guid Retired Deletable aName PaAssetlag oOmmgow NOTE The example below shows the fields required for importing new tags and attributes and presumes a blank template 1 e nothing has been exported in the screenshot below so the guid field is blank However all of the other attribute fields must have values
12. Record Value Changes Values Are Unique Restrictable Hide On User Console ID Type Initially the asset attribute editor is grouped into two areas which are Name and Type and Asset Type s Using Attribute The Name and Type area contains the basic definition of the new attribute The Asset Type s Using Attribute will list all asset types currently using the asset attribute Initially this list will be empty until the asset attribute is added to an asset type Complete the Attribute configuration fields Name Name is the name of the asset attribute The name is used on all forms to prompt for the asset attribute data so it is advised to use a clear concise and intuitive name for the new attribute Description Description is a detailed comment describing purpose or meaning of the asset attribute Record Value Changes This check box tells Asset Manager to record all values for this attribute for the life of the asset All value changes will be recorded for historical reporting and life cycle tracking For example if an attribute called Owner is created then the Record Value Changes checkbox selects whether or not to record the historical values of the Owner If the values are stored then reports can be generated showing ownership changes over time Otherwise Asset Manager only knows the current value of the attribute and no previous ownership information is available Values Are Unique
13. dy Asset Manager Manage Assets Bookmarks Export Assets 2 Export Style Simple Export Human readable data File cannot be re imported Advanced Export Complex data for modification File can be re imported s Attributes to Export amp Export all asset attributes Export asset attributes in view 7 Include binary data Export JSON Export CSV 4 Dotthe radio button next to Export all asset attributes and then click Export CSV NOTE If you have pictutes or other non text attachments associated with your assets click to check the Include binary data checkbox 40 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 5 Save the File or open it with a spreadsheet program that reads CSV files e g Microsoft Excel as seen in the screenshot below Opening assets export 20121204114844 csv You have chosen to open El assets export 20121204114844 csv which is a Microsoft Excel Comma Separated Values File from http am rfcode com 6580 What should Firefox do with this file Do this automatically for files like this from now on Configuring an Asset Export File to Populate and then Import An Asset Export file in CSV file format is really just a spreadsheet and it will look similar to the following ME Boke assets export 20121204114844 Read Only Microsoft Excel Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View
14. e Name The name of the Threshold e Threshold Schedule Click the Ellipsis button to open a scheduling window Disable and enable the days times that you would like to schedule this threshold for By default the threshold schedule is set to Always Active This means that left in the default state the threshold will open and close alert any time the alert conditions are met To disable certain days times select the day time blocks you would like to disable and click the Disable button Or select the Disable All button which will disable the threshold schedule for all days times To enable certain day time slots select the desired days times and click the Enable button To enable all day time slots click the Enable All button Click the OK button to save the schedule or the Cancel button to cancel the schedule e Enabled To enable an Alert Threshold you much check this checkbox e Alert Severity The severity level for an alert In order of most severe to least severe the severities are Fazlure Critical Error Warning and Informational e User Required to Acknowledge Alert When checked this checkbox requires that the alert be acknowledged before it 1s considered closed Alert Filter The following fields comprise the Alert Filter configuration settings for Thresholds NOTE Changing a filter for an existing threshold will resolve any open alerts generated by the previous filter definition of the threshold Thr
15. will appear in the Computer Details Category at the bottom of the Attribute list for Tablet Asses Editing an Asset Attribute Associated with an Asset Type Editing the Attributes associated with Asset Types is essentially the same as creating the associations To edit an Asset Attribute associated with an Asset Type perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Admin Console gt Data Schema gt Asset Type 2 Select the Asset Type you wish to edit from the Asset Type hierarchy tree and the Asset Type editor will display the details of the selected Asset Type 3 Edit the desired information about the Asset Type and click the Save button when editing is complete 76 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Deleting an Asset Attribute Associated with an Asset Type Removing an Asset Attribute from an Asset Type does NOT delete any values of that Attribute Type from any assets that have been added to the system When viewing an asset via the User Console the information will not be displayed but it remains in the database and can be accessed using the Asset Manager API or directly in the database e g SQL database access To delete an Asset Attribute from an Asset Type perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Admin Console gt Data Schema gt Asset Type and the Asset Type task pane will appear on the right 2 Select the Asset Type you w
16. Air Pressure Sensor 1 Differential Pressure Air Pressure Sensor 2 Air Pressure Sensor 3 Air Pressure Sensor 4 Air Pressure Sensor 5 Austin Data C X CRAC 1 CRAC Z Dell Server 1 Dell Server 10 Dell Server 100 3 Select one ot more Groups that will have access to information about the Asset and then click the Right Arrow gt button to move the Group from the Available side to the Selected side 1 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com H COD Z 4 Click OK when finished The Group you selected will appear in the row for that Asset in the Allowed User Groups column P Asset Manager Access Control 9 Add Groups B A Edit Group E Remove Groups CTO 0 7 S Dashboard 2 Tag Management Customization 6 Assets 2 Access Control Access Control Type Location Asset v All Name Air Pressure Sensor 1 Air Pressure Sensor 2 Air Pressure Sensor 3 Air Pressure Sensor 4 Air Pressure Sensor 5 Austin Data Center CRAC 1 Status Attribute Operator Value ow Active v w Asset Type Differential Pressure Differential Pressure Differential Pressure Differential Pressure Differential Pressure Data Center CRAC Unit Description Allowed User Groups While the use of Access Control enables the granularity of allowing and restricting views of assets to Groups of Users it does require some administra
17. REF COD Getting Started with Asset Manager Asset Manager is a robust enterprise application that is easy to install and use almost immediately but it has incredible flexibility to accommodate complex environments and enormous deployments of millions of tags and assets However as with any system that can be both simple and complicated to manage Asset Manager requires a fundamental understanding of its structure and the possibilities therein as well as knowledge of the quickest paths to determine what direction is right for your particular needs With any asset management system the fundamental structure involves assets objects or conditions of interest the location of those assets and the state of those assets This summary encompasses the need to keep data center computing equipment functioning optimally expensive hospital equipment tracked and available for easiest use Typically a system administrator installs and configures the application and database for a population of end users Asset Manager is no different This guide is written for an audience of administrators as they need to know everything and then some about the application they are deploying and or supporting Within this guide are also the means by which end users can access the information they need to ensure that their assets are functioning and functioning optimally Keep in mind that there are assets in the system and that these assets have attributes characteris
18. Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Upgrading Asset Manager If you haven t already done so request an upgrade download link from RF Code Support support rfcode com NOTE If you are upgrading from Sensor Manager to Asset Manager the instructions are the same as the new installation executable accommodates for previous installations of Sensor Manager NOTE If you are upgrading multiple Zone Managers upgrade them prior to upgrading Asset Manager If the Zone Manager was originally installed from the Asset Manager installation package you can use the dowloaded image to upgrade the Zone Manager instances otherwise you will need to request a Zone Manager upgrade image as a separate request to RF Code Suppott NOTE Beginning with Asset Manager version 2 5 a 64 bit operating system is required For full system requirements refer to System Requirements for Asset Manager If you are using a version of Asset Manager between 2 3 3 and 2 5 and it 1s installed in a 32 bit operating system you will need to find or create a suitable 64 bit installation environment After receiving the new version of Asset Manager perform the following steps 1 Download and unzip the upgrade image 2 Back up your entire full database using your normal database utilities e g SQL Server Management Studio pg_dump psal etc including all configuration settings and all historical data Depending on
19. System Alert Action Basic Information SE 1 File Transfer Alert Action HTTP Post Alert Action Name Action Schedule Logging Alert Action Enabled Serial Device Send Alert Action SNMP V1 Trap Alert Action SNMP V3 Alert Action Repeat Alert Acti 4 The settings available in the action editor pane enable you to configure the alert action Configuring Alert Actions Basic Information The following fields comprise the Basic Information configuration settings for all Alert Actions e Name Name the alert action and select the Enabled checkbox to enable the action e Action Schedule Click the button which will prompt a scheduling window Disable and enable the days times that you would like to schedule this action for By default the action schedule is set to Always Active This means that left in the default state the action will execute any time an associated alert threshold opens closes To disable certain days times select the day time blocks you would like to disable and click the Disable button Or select the Disable All button which will disable the action schedule for all days times To enable certain day time slots select the desired days times and click the Enable button To enable all day time slots click the Enable All button Click the OK but ton to save the schedule or the Cancel button to cancel the schedule e Repeat alert action Select this checkbox to allow the alert action to repe
20. An Asset Manager user may choose to either retire or purge an Entity A retired Entity no longer records history but its previous history is still available to view A purged Entity and any associated historical values are completely removed from the Asset Manager as if it never existed Attribute An Attribute represents a single property of an Entity Each Attribute has an associated value The data type of the Attribute s value is described within the Attribute s associated Attribute Class object Each attribute may store history depending on the History Recorded property of the Attribute Class Attribute Class An Attribute Class represents the definition of an Attribute Each Attribute Class must have a unique object ID An Attribute Class has the following properties Attribute Class Properties Describes the attribute class in detail Deletable Describes whether or not a user can delete this attribute class Attribute Class objects defined by the Asset Manager and not a user are marked as non deletable Retired If true this attribute class is no longer accessible for editing History can still be viewed Updates to attributes of this class no longer occut History Recorded If true all changes to an attribute of this class ate recorded in the history If false only the current value is stored Values Used only by an enum Attribute Class This is the list of strings in which each value cotresponds to a specific enumerated value
21. Available Selected Filter Filter Basic Map View Data Center Air Pressure View Data Center Rack Temperatures Data Center RCI and RTI s P OK Cancel NOTE To add or edit a Map View click Map Views in the Locations Rules Maps task list Creating and Using Map Hot Spots After creating a map one of the first features to explore is Hot Spots so you can for example create a click through path to another map At the top of the Map Editing screen is the Hot Spot Tools control panel Hot Spot Tools iE E3 a e I3 o EJE a Use the second icon from the left to create a rectangular hot spot If you want to create a multi dimensional hot spot 1 e one that is not rectangular then click the third icon from the left the one immediately to the right of the square rectangle Although maps are generally separates by function i e one map might show showing sensor readings summaries and another might show a geographical click through based on larger to smaller geographical area you can include both types on the same map 160 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD In the example below one hot spot points to a Rack Location one specific rack in a row of racks which then drills down to another map that show individual temperature sensors each of which represented by its own hot spot on the destination map Notice
22. Console Both Events and Alerts enable the Administrator and Users who have the necessary Role or Permissions to configure notifications about states of the Asset Manager system which includes RF Code hardware used to monitor it as well as notifications about the state of the assets you are managing and the environment you are monitoring In other words the former Events allow administrators to set conditions for when and how they want to be notified about something within the Asset Manager system When information within the Asset Manager system changes in a way that satisfies these conditions the Events sub system sends notifications to users or outside systems based on the actions that are configured for the event Alerts have a set condition and a clear condition or a begin and end while Events do not need to have a beginning and end for notifications but rather use triggers configured by the administrator that will cause an Event notification to be produced The events feature might be used to send data from Asset Manager to other software systems or to notify users when certain conditions occur while the latter Alerts are configured to ensure that you know the location of your assets their operational state and conditions of the environment in which they are being used The following is a summary of the differences and similarities among Events and Alerts e Events and Alerts are similar in that both Events
23. Q RESTORE DATABASE daytona FROM DISK c Nsqlbak bak WITH REPLACE NOTE If during the Backup or Restore process an Operating system error 5 Access is denied error occurs you will need to change the Windows Service SQL Server RFCASSETMGR to run as a Local System account 262 e ns Y f Ay m ax rr rj E NT A T A c Nl 35 gt Pn j A a f rn Y A ATA i pm Y VAYA m E pnm rms a Fa aa y 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD ADL mune E cn gt u ern i gt eae ong wp oe LT bon Loewe L3 e NN o 0o M Ro n a el ueno oi arat PO Dore Jl PP tere a Uu ete ms nm w iea PA A a mp ow ead mt mst ette Pure We te Lag mm e e P we s ud ow om Led sm of og Go a ro A me 9 et t se a de o es Si mem om mm gt wets e ors Ee P D m Ae a et L ba ws he ave m uw vi MS i eo ener Lica tome vn vae O mu de Backup and Restore with PostgreSQL If you are using PostgreSQL to house your Asset Manager database and need to back it up and restore it please refer to the PostereSQL documentation As of May 2013 this information can be found online at the following location http www postgtesql org docs 8 3 static backup html 263 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd
24. The first is a group of pre defined attributes that cannot be changed The second Calculated Asset Attributes are created and defined with formulas to create dynamic alerting and reporting features within Asset Manager and are a key component to Summary Assets The two special classes of attributes as well as Summary Assets are covered in separate sections of this document The first type of attribute is the main type of Asset Attribute These can be created and assigned to Asset Types Creating New Asset Attributes To create an Asset Attribute perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Admin Console gt Data Schema gt Asset Attributes e Asset Manager Administration Asset Attributes Locations Rules Maps 77 Status Attributes t 7 Calculated Asset Attributes The asset attributes task pane will appear on the right It is divided into two sections which are the list of defined asset attributes on the left and the asset attribute editor on the right At the top of the task pane are two buttons which are New and Delete 66 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 2 Click the New button at the top of the task pane Asset Manager Administration Asset Attributes The asset attribute editor section of the task pane will open a form with fields to configure the new Asset Attribute Name and Type Name Description
25. The impact of RFID on IT systems depends on three factors the power of the transmission the distance from the emission source and the type of equipment in the path of the transmission RF Regulatory Compliance and RF Transmissions Safety Transmission power is strictly regulated by governments to ensure that IT devices can coexist with RFID systems Part 1 of the US FCC Part 15 mandates that a certified wireless device may not cause harmful interference Moreover most IT equipment is enclosed in a metal casing that is RF opaque to UHF transmissions at 433 MHz RF Code tag transmissions do not penetrate the metal casings of typical IT equipment RF Code systems do not have any negative affect on IT equipment in a data center or in similar environments like telecommunications VJ JO Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 5 p gy 1 RF COD centers Over two million RF Code tags have been deployed in the past decade with more than 500 000 tags mounted directly on IT servers There has never been a report of data loss or degradation in any storage or security device due to the presence and or operation of RF Code tags and readers Comparison of Active RFID Tag and Cell Phone Signals From the IBM white paper Usimg RFID Technology within close proximity of IT systems and equipment 2006 Some cellular telephones typically operate in the same frequency range for
26. This stops thresholds in the system from functioning or alerts from happening When the Active setting is restored the thresholds and alert actions that occur from that moment on will resume How to Set Up Some Specific Alerts The following instructions are useful when configuring some specific kinds of alerts How to Set Up a Serial Asset Alert To set up a Serial Alert Action perform the following steps 1 2 Connect the serial device to the reader using a USB to RS232 USB to serial converter NOTE A female female F F gender changer may be required to connect the cable Use the web interface to the reader and set the Serial Port to the following d Reader Serial Ports E Configuration Fiker Sa Network Configuration nyuso iai Reader Configuration d Users MM Up Connect e Tre Serial Ports NOTE The baud rate and driver setting depends on the hardware to be connected In the Admin Console browse to Configuration gt Readers Select the reader to be configured Set the Serial Driver for the Serial Port to text 8n1 Then in the User Console go to Alert Management gt Actions Set up a new Alert Action for the serial device The following command strings are used to communicate with serial interface converter controllers 1 e output relays e g Patlite PHC 100 Relays Panels 114 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 219
27. could be a Blade a Blade Chassis ot other form factor of IBM computing technology The Link Location filter allows for location specific filtering if it s desired to view assets in a specific location or hierarchy Both the Link Type and Link Location are top down in their functionality where anything from the designated level on down will be included In this example every asset that resides in or under North America would be included The Link Attribute fields are an additional step of filtering whereby a specific attribute can be compared against If the comparison matches the resulting assets will be displayed In this example we are looking specifically for IBM equipment so we are comparing against the Manufacturer attribute and requiring it to be IBM Asset Link Filter Link Type Computer xw Link Location North America X w Link Attribute Manufacturer X cw Link Attribute Value Operator X vw Link Attribute Value IBM LO NA All of the Asset Link Filter selections are optional and with none specified users will have access visibility to all assets They are simply filtering options to restrict limit the assets returned Finally the Asset Link View s is simply a display designation that allows for specific custom views to be applied restricted allowed for the Asset Link Views are defined and managed in the User Console under Customization gt Views 190 9229
28. support being polled by third party applications with commands like snmpget or snmpwalk Hostname Specify the hostname of the server that the trap will be sent to Port Select the Port that the destination server is listening on by default this 1s 162 Community String Authentication of clients is performed by a community string in effect a type of password which is transmitted in cleartext Input the community string for your server by default this is set to public Agent IP Address Input the IP address of your agent a network management software module that resides on a managed device Additional Attributes Select the additional attributes you would like to publish for the 99 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD For SNMP V3 Event Actions The configuration settings for SNMP V3 Event Actions are the same as those for SNMP V1 Event Actions with the addition of the following configuration settings Event Action Configuration Transport Protocol Hostname Port Type of Notification Authentication User ID Authentication Password eeeeesseseseesese Confirm Password PEDIDA Authentication Protocol SHA 1 NOTE Asset Manager can send out bound SNMP traps alarms to an external third party management system however it does not suppott being polled by third party applications with commands like snm
29. you can assign one or more Groups to each User account in order to allow the User to inherit traits assigned to the Group s NOTE A User can be assigned to a User Group even if Advanced Security is not enabled on the Asset Manager server however the assignment of Users to Groups enables advanced functionality only if Advanced Security is enabled To configure Advanced Security settings go to Configuration gt Server gt Asset Security For more information about Advanced Security refer to the Advanced Security section Do not change the Advanced Security settings without first consulting RF Code Support 1 3 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 TeL 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com m RFCOD Overview of Groups Using Groups you can give and restrict access to various areas and items within Asset Manager such that every User in a particular Group can only see specific assets and or attributes in the system permitted to that Group This gives you the ability to provide varying degrees of access control Access Control provides permission to or restriction from any of the following parts of the Asset Manager system BIRT Reader Serial Devices User Dashboards Event Triggers Report amp Graph Output Unassigned Tags NOTE In order to make use of Group level permissions and inheritance you must enable Advanced Asset Security For more information refer to the Advanced Security section
30. 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD User Information LIILIIILIIIIITIILJ LLLE EEE I EEE Region Settings Units Display Time Zone User Groups User Group Membership User Groups For New Assets gy Same As User Group Membership y Select User Groups For New Assets Save Changes Other settings that can be configured for each User account include e Password Use this for Users created and managed within Asset Manager that are not authenticated by LDAP e Email Address es Enter the User s email address e Expiration Date Set this to make a User account inactive on some future date e Units Display Choose an option in this drop down menu to define how the user will see units of measurement and time o Btowser OS Locale The user s settings will be inherited from their local web browser settings o English Asset and Sensor Attributes will appear as those of the imperial or English USA systems of measurement i e ounces feet temperature expressed in Fahrenheit etc o Metric Asset and Sensor Attributes will be displayed in the metric system i e grams meters temperature expressed in Celsius etc e Time Zone Use this to set the time zone for the User By default this is set to Browser OS Locale but you can manually change it to hard code the time zone by choosing a time zone from the drop down menu e User Groups After these have been created
31. ACH AOL lee A s an zin Dr eim CLEP NO OIE DO 00 Cra OI Osa IM SOA 0 ACKRAO NIL PCr aE 0022 1 tO RACE 900 M3 es rig 000972002 0 07 000n POuL Uzz55EH5BB3E 192 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD User Audit Trail Asset Manager automatically records all changes made by all Users in the system These include changes to the infrastructure readers tag groups data schema system upgrades etc as well as changes to assets themselves The User Audit Trail sub task provides a facility to view this change history as well as to export the data To view the User Audit Trail navigate to Security gt User Audit Trail Event Time Description 2013 05 21 09 43 12 Asset Created Temperature Humidity DC ROW2 RACK1 TEMP IMTAKE TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY 7c7ac22b1f9056 1b 2013 05 21 08 40 24 Import Tags All detected tags were added to the unassigned tag queue 2013 05 21 09 39 12 User Login johndoe from remote address 10 1 9 115 2013 05 21 09 38 15 admin User Created System Administrator johndoe tUser_e5003a0022dee2a2 2013 05 21 09 27 12 admin User Login admin from remote address 10 1 9 115 2013 05 21 07 48 00 admin Location Created Data Center Row 2 Rack 2 2013 05 2107 47 44 admin Location Created Data Center Row 2 Rack 1 2013 05 21 07 47 30 admin Location Created Data Center Row 2 2013 05 21 07 47 1
32. Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 TeL 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Import Jobs admin 2013 05 29 09 31 07 2013 05 29 09 31 08 config export 20121113112800 zip COMPLETE WITH ERRORS Types 42 Assets 101 Download Errors Submitter Start Time End Time _Job Filename Job Status Jab Message M 7 NOTE Assets with respect to Import Jobs can be any entity other than an Asset Type or an Asset Attribute An Asset that is counted in the Job Message column can be an Event an Action a Threshold etc The log file shows entities that failed to import i UlgBsg TBEHETIDLYT guid StAssetTemplate 29487c68051e878r retired false deletable Erne RACK POSITION F TEMP PROFILE IT RACK SENSOR SaName Temp 01 01 SaExpectedLocation SaTemplateAssetType TEMPERATURE HUMIDITY SaTemplateName Temp i ch J C in b to h3 e P mH humo type Sr ssetTemplate j tad SaDescription EXHAUST HUMIDITY LINE null SaTemplateIldentifier Temp SaLocation ROW 1 EXHAUST TEMP LINE null AIRFLOW POSITION RACK EXHAUST TEMPERATURE kLocation true YE Error Attribute class RACK POSITION was not found pl mM pa oC tn uf When an import completes successfully
33. Dashboard Filter x o Configuration 5 E E Logical View 3 Location E E en f Unknown Location e Locations Rules Maps 3 USA 3 Texas 3 es Austin My House 3 ly RF Code HQ 3 VV RF Code HQ Austin Data Center 3 RF Code HQ Austin Data Center Row 1 s RF Code HO Austin Data Center Row 1 Rack 1 a RF Code HQ Austin Data Center Row 1 Rack 2 ee RF Code HQ Austin Data Center Row 2 y Round Rock y Locations amp Rules EA Map Configuration E Map Views Ss Location to Asset Association 3 Click the Associate Asset to Location button A prompt will appear with the option to associate the location to a new asset or to associate the location to an exzsting asset Associating a Location to a New Asset To associate a location to a new asset perform the following steps 1 Click the Associate lt Location gt to New Asset option and click the OK button Associate RF Code HQ Austin Data Center Row 1 Rack 2 To x Asset 2 You will be prompted to choose an Asset Template or an Asset Type to create a new asset Depending on the option you choose the Asset information screen for that Asset Type or Asset Template will appear 3 Enter the required asset information and click the OK button to continue The location will now appear in the location tree with the location to asset association icon 63 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode c
34. Delta e Calculated Max Alert Severity e Cold Aisle Containment Door Link Hidden e Cold Aisle Door Open e CRAC Return Humidity Link e CRAC Return Temp Link e CRAC Supply Humidity Link e CRAC Supply Temp Link e CRAC Temperature e Door Counter e Door Opens per Day e Equipment Active Power e Equipment Apparent Power e Fluid Sensor Count e Intake Humidity Link Hidden e Intake Temp Link Hidden e Last Door Opened e Max Exhaust Humidity e Max Exhaust Temperature e MaxIntake Humidity e Max Intake Temperature 236 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD e Maximum Humidity e Maximum Temperature e Minimum Humidity e Minimum Temperature e Rack Active Power e Rack Apparent Power e Rack Cooling Index RCI HT e Rack Cooling Index RCI LO e Rack Door Status Link Hidden e Rack Power Capacity e Rack Temperature Delta e RCI HD Violation e RCI LO Violation e Return Temperature Index RTT e Room Active Power e Room Apparent Power e Row Active Power e Row Apparent Power e Sensor Offline Link Hidden e Total Rack Cooling Index RCI HI e Total Rack Cooling Index RCI LO e Weighted CRAC Return Temp e Weighted CRAC RTI Cooling e Weighted CRAC Supply Temp The schema contains the following Custom Attribute Types e Building Environmentals e Computing Facility Environmentals e CRAC Airflow Profile
35. E NOTE When an expression involves multiple statements the expressions are evaluated one at a time left to right The last statement which is evaluated will be returned as the value of the calculated field attribute If any exception occurs anywhere in the evaluation process null is returned as the value of the calculated field 248 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD Network Security with RF Code Readers and Asset Manager In addition to configuring Asset Manager login and user login access you can also secure your readers and Asset Manager within your network by disabling ports and web services using SSL certificates and or locking down readers NOTE By default HTTP and HTTPS will use ports 6580 and 6581 respectively However these can be changed if necessary On an M250 Reader web services can be turned off You can lock a reader by restricting access to it except from one or more users with specific usernames and passwords The server software will also need to use these login credentials in order to login to the reader Port 6500 is the only port required for proper operation Ports 80 443 and 6501 can be turned off SSH can also be turned off Readers that appear too open and respond to every request in an unsecure manner can be locked down You will notice that you can also turn off the HTTPS port This port is only used for the w
36. Environmentals e CRAC Environmentals e Door Sensor Profile e Location e Power Outlet Monitoring Profiles e Rack Environmental Sensors e Rack Power Profiles e Row Environmental Tracking e Row Power Tracking e Temp Airflow Profile e Temperature Sensor Profile V4 1_Comprehensive_Schema The V4 1_Comprehensive_Schema is designed to let you track your valuable enterprise IT and standard office assets as well as employees and other people that enter your managed environment The schema supports the entire RF Code lines of both asset tags and environmental monitoring sensor tags Schema Details This detailed schema for IT assets office assets and people employees has a large number of Asset Attributes and Calculated Attributes as well as the full list of system Standard Attributes 23 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD The V4 1_Comprehensive Schema focuses its environmental monitoring approach around classifying sensors based on where in the airflow they reside Intake and exhaust temperatures are monitored on per point per rack per row and even at a data center This schema also includes live and historical temperature change delta information for hot and cold sides of racks rows and cold hot aisle containment setups Sensor points are monitored individually but as more sensors are added to Asset Manager the key summarized stat
37. Fiter Asset State Fest Attrbute Fest Attrbute Vale Second Attribute Second Attr ute Vaue Threshold Deuy adaptwe Atrtiste Adapte Amibute Acaptve Attrbute Value Operator Acaptye Attrbute Expresson Tevpetsture Humaty Auson Data Cente Attire Te perature ven 0 v eared Aprir ta vole Weekly Tovpai B 1 10 porata AP Outs Mes Termos Mw A w Erit Orres A nietoem dart rnnt hat heec s tarter fec the axat 34larrF nnm For more information about Adaptive Alert Thresholds refer to this article on the RF Code support site http ort rfcode com customer ottal articles 1656565 192 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Integrating with RF Code IR Locators When you deploy an RF Code IR locator you need to configure it both through 1ts configuration utility and also in Asset Manager RF Code Rack Locators Proximity Locators and Room Locators are all IR locators and they each have their own configuration utility These locators send signals to IR tags and the IR tags then report to an RF Code reader that they ve been seen by a particular locator the tags make this announcement by sending additional information to the reader as part of the beacons they send To configure an IR Locator perform the following steps 1 Ensure that at least one RF Code reader has been configured
38. Ie Filter x Cn Dashboard Ss Configuration E i 5 e Location E Integration 3 a HO ee Locations Rules Maps 3 Lab 3 Lab Rule 1 A Map Configuration 3 Lab DC ew Locations amp Rules l Map Views CRAC Unit 01 X Location to Asset Association 3 Row 1 Rack 01 01 Rack 01 02 Rack 01 03 54 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Expected Location When you populate the system with your assets you have the option to define an expected location Expected Locations are just that where an asset is expected to be ge zm x m T9 T8 8 o 8 0 Type Location Status Attribute Value Temperature Fw All v Active v v Name Asset Type Asset Tag Asset Location Expected Location s Temp 01 01 BM Temperature Humidity TMPRCKO0004434 4 RackOi 01 T Edit Temperature Basic Information Expected Location s E Name Available 2 a Asset Tag Filter l Te Description 3 Location 3 Ho Te suey Asset Location aeu A Expected Location s g Lab DC E E CRAC Unit 01 T dy Row 1 Te 2 s I Lock Location ss Rack 01 01 1 Rack 01 02 Te Additional Sensor informa Rack 01 03 Te Temperature Sensor A T Airflow Position If a tag reports that it and the Asset associated with it are not at the Expected Location then you
39. Opacity Map Family This is an ad hoc designation for the type or category of map e g Data Center or Geographical Initially there are no Map Families in the system therefore whatever you type in the field will be saved as a Map Family and available for future use Subsequent uses of this field will give you a list of all of the Map Families that you have previously created and which have been added to the drop down selection menu Name This field is an arbitrary designation but when someone sees the name of the map in the Location Hierarchy it should be obvious what the Map represents Map Image This is where you upload a graphic to be used for the new Map and serve as the background of the map To upload a graphic for use as the map image click the sign next to the Map Image field 159 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Additional configuration options for Maps include the following fields Default Map View This option lets you define which view will be defaulted to when this map is browsed to Is Default Map Check this checkbox to default to this particular map if the location 1s clicked on in the Map View Map Views This option can restrict specific views of the map to certain users Map Views simply define which sensor attribute s and or data can be displayed for the respective hot spot in the map view
40. RECOD 4 After physically connecting the reader to the LAN and determining the IP address and or URL browse to it and open the reader web console the browser GUI Mae heart PX tall E9 ti Al 10 rare El 5 Click Tags in the left hand column 6 Under the Tag Groups heading in the next column to the right click the Add button and you will see the Tag Group dialog box appear on your screen a Reader Tags Configuration L Network Configuration iml Reader Configuration a Users MA Up Connect 5 Time Serial Ports Tag Group S Diagnostics Group Code Taos Summary M Tools Treatment code 7 Inthe Group Code field of the Tag Group dialog box type the Group Code of any of your tags The Group Code is a 6 character code found on the bottom left of a tag right below the barcode NOTE For more information about tags Group Codes Tag IDs and Treatment Codes refer to the RF Code Tags section in the Appendix 226 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 8 After entering a Group Code click the OK button In the sample below the Group Code THSRCK is in the Group Code field Reader Tags o Configuration EX Network Configuration kal Reader Configuration a Users Tag Group If Up Connect 5 Time Group Code Tag Filter 8 Serial Ports cn Diagnostics ene E Summary NOTE Th
41. RFCOD Assume an Asset Manager system contains all of the following e 50 readers e 10 users e O60 IT Racks spread across 6 rows in a single data center e 75 unique locations defined in the Location Tree e 2 500 inventory assets e 350 sensors assets e 67 summary assets associated to the 60 IT Racks 6 Rows 1 Data Center locations Licenses are consumed only by the assets in the last three bullets the 2 500 inventory assets the 350 sensor assets and the 67 summary assets However none of the readers users racks or locations in the Location Tree consume a license therefore the total number of licenses required in this scenario would be 2 917 Most often an asset does have an asset tag or sensor tag associated with it but this not always the case especially with summary assets Summaty assets are assets that represent a location and an asset Summary assets typically don t have asset tags associated to them but like all other assets they each consume a license For more about summary assets refer to the Summary Asset section Knowing how licenses are consumed is important when you calculate the number of licenses that you need to purchase Licenses for Advanced Features and Modules Additional or premium features are also licensed and can be unlocked or enabled by entering the appropriate license key The following premium features are license controlled e JMX and Tivoli Monitoring Integration e BACnet Integration Modul
42. StartTime End Time Job Filename Job Status Job Message di Manage Assets Manage Assets By Location Qi Manage Assets By Type NOTE If there ate any errors in the import job they will be presented in the Import Jobs pane which is the same Import Jobs pane visible to Administrators for Schema Imports and Config Imports Refer to the Import Jobs section in the Appendix for mote information about the statuses messages and errors associated with imports In the User Console navigate to Assets gt Manage Assets to view the newly added assets 43 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com H COD Z Data Schema The Data Schema task configuration area in the Admin Console lets you edit and or add all of the following e Asset Attributes e Status Attributes e Calculated Asset Attributes e Asset Types e Custom Attribute Types e Statistical Pack e Statistical Policy e Schema Import S Dashboard 3 Configuration E Integration e Locations Rules Maps ES Data Schema Asset Attributes 7 Status Attributes Ce Calculated Asset Attributes di Asset Types Custom Attribute Types Statistical Pack Statistical Policy ift Schema Import NOTE The Schema Import task lets you load a Default Asset Schema or a Custom Schema that has been pre defined Asset Types Asset types define a specific type of asset such as an IT a
43. Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD To add LDAP Groups perform the following steps 1 Goto Security gt LDAP Server gt Permissions i Asset Manager Administration LDAP Server PICA NICE PEN FER a ema User Group Role DW Encineering Test Administrator Dan Horowitz Administrator 2 Click Add Group 3 Complete the Create Ldap Group configuration fields User Information LDAP Group Roles User Groups User Group Membership LDAP Group Choose the name of the LDAP User Roles Assign a Role to the User User Group Membership Assign a Group to the User User Groups For New Assets Chose either to use the same Group as the User Group or choose one or more different Groups 4 Click OK NOTE When a User logs in for the first time based on group LDAP membership a new user will be created on the use list This user will have limited configuration options and is used to store preferences such as unit of measurement The account can be deleted from the system but will be recreated the next time a user logs in if LDAP group membership continues to allow access 188 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com H COD Z Statistical Computation Engine Licensing The Statistical Computation Engine is license key enabled functionality that adds the ability to produce statistic
44. Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 2 Goto Manage Assets and create new PDU sensor assets using a PDU Asset Type HB Q Asset E Q Inventory 3 Y Sensor Q Differential Pressure Q Door Q Dry Contact Q Fluid Q PDU Q POU Bo PDU Feed Line Q PDU Input Channel Q PDU Outlet Q POU Phase 3 Complete the PDU configuration fields and save the new asset The new Asset will appear in your list of Assets similar to the following Operator Value Wr w wr Go Asset Tag Online Status Message Loss Rate PDU Disconnected PDU Model RTNRCK00055504 Yes EMRRCK 0055805 Yes GSTRCK00059606 Yes 195 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 4 To get further details for any specific parent PDU device double click the row for it from the Asset list NOTE The PDU Attributes and values are found within various tabs EMP PDU 1 Basic Information Mama EMP PDU 1 Asset Tag EMRRCKOO055805 Description Asset Location Location Mode Locked Locked Location Expected Location s NOTE Data collection from PDUs happens in 10 minute intervals On data reported on a 10 minute period the PDU will take a snapshot of the data for the most recent 10 minute period and depending on the PDU implementation and the specific data being requested and sent this may represent the data as of the
45. Thresholds are created in the Admin Console Asset Alert Thresholds are created in the User Console You can create any of the following System Alert Thresholds from the Admin Console System Alert Threshold Reader High Traffic Alert Threshold Reader Noise Alert Threshold Reader Offline Alert Threshold Reader Tag Capacity Alert Threshold Zone Manager Offline Alert Threshold 110 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RI COD From the User Console you can create any of the following Alert Thresholds Asset Alert Threshold Asset Offline Alert Threshold Custom Alert Threshold Differential Pressure Alert Threshold Door Close Alert Threshold Door Open Alert Threshold Fluid Detected Alert Threshold Humidity Alert Threshold Low Battery Alert Threshold Motion Alert Threshold Tamper Alert Threshold Temperature Alert Threshold Unexpected Location Alert Threshold Creating Alert Thresholds To create and configure an Alert Threshold perform the following steps 1 4 Navigate to Alert Management gt Thresholds The Threshold task pane will appear on the right with a default viewing showing a list of any Thresholds that have already been created if any and a Thresholds Editor on the right that defaults to the System Alert Threshold drop down menu but which populates with fiel
46. UHF RFID and with an emission power of about 200 600 milliwatts and more Cell phones are commonly used neat beside or even within 3G GPRS cards IT equipment Thus far no harmful RF interference from these uses has been reported The maximum radiated emission from an RF tag operating at 433 MHz is less than 0 0028 milliwatts To put RF Code tag power emissions in perspective consider that cellular telephones operate with emission power levels that are 70 000 to 210 000 times greater than those emitted by RFC active RFID tags 200 mW 0 0028 mW 71 429 10 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD RF Code Software and Hardware Overview Asset Manager provides a comprehensive asset management and environmental monitoring system that provides a front end user interface to configure and monitor RF Code active RFID tag and reader solutions which are deployed across a wide variety of business infrastructures The end to end system builds up from the hardware layer of tags which send message beacons to RFID readers which relay the information to Zone Manager the RF Code middleware application which then passes the information on to the top level server which is then accessed by end users through a web console launched in a standard web browser Asset Manager Enterprise Console SQL Database RF Code Readers RE Transmission I
47. Views and click the New button create a new view to show specific power attributes Y Asset Manager Views Filter a Tag Management te IE Gy Default View 3 Door Sensor View Asset Templates y Environmental View ay Views Ey Sensor View y Customization 2 Configure the View to show the Attributes you want to see and choose which User Groups will have access to it Basic Information Name NN Asset Types Available Filter Activation Count 1 Activation Count 2 Activation Input 1 Activation Input 2 Active Alert Count Agent IP Address Airflow Position Alert Acknowledge Note Alert Acknowledged Alert Acknowledged By Alert Message Alert Repeat Message Alert Resolve Message Groups Allowed User Groups Everyone Filter Name Asset Type Asset Location PDU Active Power PDU Disconnected Towers PDU Model PDU Power Factor POU Serial Number POU Total Active Power Used POU Total Apparent Power Used PDU Total Power Time 197 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 9 The new view appear in the list of Views i Asset Manager Views uu Ter B o 5 mte Data Center RCI F EEG Asset Templates dd Data Center Su 3 Views 3 Default View w Door Sensor View Y Environmental Vie a Fluid Sensor View 43 PDU Brief 3 PDU Details h m ud Rack Asset To see the PDUs and the
48. When alert conditions are processed by Asset Manager the alert details can be viewed by using this sub task Alerts can be filtered using the Filter Bar Alerts can be filtered by Asset Type Attribute or Status Open Closed 105 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD The Alert Viewer provides the following controls e Pause Resume Update button By default the Alert View will be continually updated in the browser Use the Pause button to stop the alert view from updating This is especially useful when there is a high volume of alerts Click Resume to enable real time updates e View button View the details of a selected alert e Acknowledge button Acknowledge a selected alert This option is only available for thresholds that have been configured with the User Required to Acknowledge Alert check box in the Alert Threshold sub task e Delete button Delete the alert from the Asset Manager database e Delete All Closed Will delete all alerts that have been closed from the Asset Manager database Notification of system alerts also happens in the Alert field at the bottom of both the Admin Console and the User Console in the middle area between the Current User and the Logout link The most recent alert and the number of open alerts will be visible in red You can then view these alerts in the Alert Viewer by navigating to it
49. Z O Z O Z O Z O Z O Reporter Viewer Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No O e Yes O S S Yes O o e o O o e lt i LIZ Z1Z o o o o Z O O O e o O o O o O o Jo d o o lt E Yes e e o des i O o es e o Yes Yes o e e S e M lt es Yes S Yes O o O S Yes Yes es es e O ZiIzixi izizizizizizizizizizizi z 2 lo fo o o o lo o o o lo lo 12 12 S e O o O o o O O ZiIZzi tzizizizizizizizizizizizizizi izizi iziz 618 lo o fo lo lo Jo lo lo lo lo lo fo lo lo 8 lo o o lo 243 ax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Macros are variables specified during the configuration of some fields and which are replaced with actual values dynamically when the system sends or displays the attribute value Macros can be used within e Email Action messages and addresses for Reports Graphs Events and Alerts e Directory paths and filenames for various actions e The titles of dashboard widgets Macros are inserted by specifying the macro name within the text value of a field that supports Macros prefaced with a dollar sign and enclosed between curly brackets Macros for Reports and Graphs Below is a table of the macros available for use with Report and Graph Email Actions Select Macro Macro Description
50. a date Day of week Sunday t Monday 2 etc given a date Day of year oven a date Days since epoch given a date Month of year January 1 etc gwen a date Current tmo Year gen a date 3 Click the OK button and the function will appear in the Attribute Expression box 4 Add the attribute to the function by placing the cursor in the date function string just after the word year 5 Type an open parentheses and then click the Attribute button 6 Select Purchase Date as the attribute NOTE You can use the Filter field to find this attribute by typing the first few letters of the attribute you want to use Pite Purchase Date Nae Days Lfe Span Purchase Dato Days purchase date TEST dt day Purchase Date INT TEST di day Purchase Date wrong type TEST A Gays Purchase Dato INT TEST A moetn Purchase Data wrong type TEST di year Purchase Date wrong type 7 Click the OK button The attribute will appear in the attribute expression box 8 Type a closed parenthesis At this stage the attribute expression will appear as follows date year PURCHASE DATE month day 82 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 9 Repeat the function assignment for the other two components of the date function month and day by first placing the cursor next to the word month and typing an open parenthesis
51. and Alerts can be configured with the same types of notifications Actions which include sending email posting messages via HTTP writing notification messages to logs etc with the exception that Alerts can also be sent to Serial Devices e Events and Alerts are different in the following ways o Events happen by Triggers which are configured using Asset Condition Filters in both the Admin Console and the User Console although the latter has an additional Trigger setting called Security that can be configured to define the Execution User Account o Alerts happen at Thresholds which are configured by setting a hardware state asset state or environmental state beyond which the Alert will occur Threshold configuration differs between the Admin Console and the User Console in the following way The Admin Console is used to configure Alert condition filters for the following Reader conditions high traffic noise offline tag capacity and Zone Manager conditions offline You can also set a Global Alert Policy in the Admin Console that affects all alerts for all users The User Console is used to configure Alert condition filters for the following Asset Offline Conditions Custom Conditions Pressure Conditions Door States Fluid Leaks Humidity Conditions Low Battery States Motion Detected Conditions Tamper States Temperature Conditions and Unexpected Conditions o Alerts create historical events in the Alert Viewer whe
52. and Reports are very similar As with Reports Graphs are first defined and then run either manually from the Graphs task area or programmatically through scheduling and other functions The major difference between Reports and Graphs is that Graphs allow you to create visual representations of the same information that you can create with Reports although there is a balance between how much information you include in your Graphs and how useful or discernible the information is to you i e if you include too many parameters you re Graph will at best not be visually appealing and at worst not informative or useful at all RF Code provides a number of Graph Templates with Asset Manager that you can use to create Graphs about the data being collected by your readers and Zone Manager s These Graph Templates can be customized in order to suit your needs to view specific information There is also a Custom Graph Template for readers and Zone Managers that allow for complete customization of the contents of the Graph within the bounds of the Asset Manager graphing capabilities Manage Graphs Creating Graph definitions is done through the Manage Graphs menu which lets you specify what will be graphed and how Asset Manager provides some standard graph templates to help you create graphs but you can also create completely customized Graphs Configuring Graph definitions is essentially the same in both the Admin Console and in the User Console with the e
53. and other countries PostereSQL is a registered trademark of the PostgreSQL Global Development Group Intel Core Duo Processor is a trademark of Intel Corporation in the U S and or other countries Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation Safari is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Oracle Java and Java Management Extensions are registered trademarks of Oracle and or its affiliates BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE Modbus is a trademark of the Modbus Organization Inc Eclipse and BIRT are trademarks of the Eclipse Foundation Inc NetBotz is a Registered Trademark of American Power Conversion Corporation All other product names are copyright and registered trademarks or trade names of their respective owners Copyright Statement Copyright 2008 2015 RF Code Inc All Rights Reserved This document as well as the hardware and firmware described therein are furnished under license and may only be used or copied in accordance with the terms of such license The information in these pages are furnished for informational use only are subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by RF Code Inc RF Code assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors of inaccuracies that may appear in these pages RF Code reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein RF Code makes no warranty re
54. assets in the Summary Asset Location This summary information derived from the Calculated Attributes on Summary Assets is ideal information for Dashboard Views and Map Views In fact Calculated Attributes are one of the main reasons for creating Summary Assets One increasingly popular and valuable data center metric the Rack Cooling Index RCI can be generated using Calculated Attributes Note that the RCI and the Return Temperature Index RTT are both included in the default schema and available for use when you define Summary Assets For example if you take the three temperature values of temperature sensors placed at the top middle and bottom of a rack and you apply the RCI formula inherent in the RCI Calculated Attribute you can calculate the RCI for the rack By defining a Summary Asset at the row level you can similarly calculate RCI for the row as well Calculated Attributes are defined and configured by the Administrator in the Schema Editor For more information refer to the Calculated Asset Attributes section in this document Review of Summary Assets Summary Assets count as licensed assets They do not necessarily need to be created for each and every Location defined in the system it all depends upon your scenario and the level of summary information you wish to collect For example to use RCI and RTI metrics you will need to use those Calculated Attributes associated with the proper Summary Assets While Summary Assets themsel
55. at Sars TO IN 2 Add a Remote Device via Pod Sharing to establish a connection is to the RF Code software NOTE The Remote Device is the IP Address of the Asset Manager server 111100 1117182 Mit 1117102 1117102 1117102 181 17 102 10117102 eel fes ven ves vee vee ves ves res ves ree beste arem Pot img innere us 3 After the Remote Device is added a list of available sensors from Asset Manager is displayed 4 Add the sensors to the NetBotz appliance 214 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD NOTE Each RF Code Sensor Tag is displayed as a Pod The following table shows which RF Code sensor tags are displayed by which APC NetBotz Pod R135 Fluid Sensor Tag R150 Temperature Tag R155 Temp Humidity Tag In addition to creating a Pod for each RF Code sensor tag the integration creates the following pods for each RF Code Reader with the following sensors for the reader e Reader Status Disabled Connecting Initializing Initialized Active Disconnecting Disconnected Reader Failure Config Failure Connect Failure Noise Detected Access Denied High Traffic Unknown e Tag Capacity Used The percentage of tag capacity of the reader utilized RF Code Sensors will appear like the following when viewed in InfrastruXure Central Y tratta Comma 3 4 10118716 X oe te MA eer ret
56. be accessed from within the Asset Manager web console at any time as well While one schema is more extensive than the other both are extremely comprehensive As such you will probably not need all of the Asset Types and Asset Attributes that become available to you after you import one or the other schema If you want to delete those types and attributes that you do not need or will not need in the near future there is no harm in doing so You can always add them back later In addition if there are any types or attributes that you will need and which are not included in either schema please contact RF Code Support for assistance It s not prohibitively difficult to create them on your own and the system easily allows this but if you are new to Asset Manager then you might create more than you need or create them in a way that is not optimal or effective for your specific needs RF Code Support and RF Code Professional Services are resources available our team is always ready to assist you in the management of your assets and the monitoring of your environment The two default schemas are described in detail below V4 1_Sensor_Tags_Only_Schema This schema is designed to be used to monitor sensors in a datacenter environment Schema Details The V4 1_Sensor_Tags_Only_Schema focuses its environmental monitoring approach around classifying sensors based on where in the airflow they reside Intake and exhaust temperatures are monitored on a
57. can be modified if using another LDAP server Group DN Attribute This is the Distinguished Name DN of the LDAP group User Membership Attribute The defaults to memberOf and should not be changed Note Frequently the same search base used for users can be reused for Groups 3 After you have entered all of the fields correctly click the Test button at the top left of the screen You will receive a message box that indicates that the LDAP server test was successful 4 Click Save Changes to save your LDAP Settings 5 Go back and add LDAP Users and or LDAP Groups to Asset Manager by following the instructions in the Adding LDAP Users and Groups section below Go back and add LDAP users and or LDAP Groups to Asset Manager Adding LDAP Users and Groups To add LDAP Users perform the following steps 1 Go to Security gt LDAP Server gt Permissions 186 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD i Asset Manager Administration LDAP Server 2 Click Add User 3 Complete the Create Ldap User configuration fields Assets LDAP User Choose the name of the LDAP User Roles Assign a Role to the User User Group Membership Assign a Group to the User User Groups For New Assets Chose either to use the same Group as the User Group or choose one or more different Groups 4 Click OK 197 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd
58. com REF COD Time The Time section lets you choose the time parameters for running the Graph You can set specific or relative times or time ranges for Graphs just the same as you can for Reports The following Types of Graph time definitions criteria are available Relative Time You can configure Time to show conditions for Now 6 Hours Ago 12 Hours Ago 1 day ago 7 days ago 30 days ago 60 days ago or 90 days ago Specific Time An example of a specific time for a report is 1 00pm on 11 14 2008 Relative Time Range An example of a relative time range is Last Hour Last 6 Hours Last 12 Hours Last Day Last 7 Days Last 30 Days Last 60 Days or Last 90 Days Specific Time Range An example of a specific time range for a report is 1 00pm on 11 14 2008 to 8 00pm on 11 14 2008 Calendar Time Range You can configure Time to show conditions for Thzs Day This Week or This Month Graph Schedule The Graph Schedule section allows the graph to be configured to run on a scheduled basis Scheduled graphs can be run on a daily weekly or monthly basis When the Schedule button is clicked the scheduler window will appear allowing you to select the appropriate schedule for the graph NOTE You can only run five 5 graph jobs simultaneously If you choose more than five Graphs to run at once the first five will be processed and any remaining graphs will be queued until one of the currently running graphs is complete this prevents
59. condition was detected for the asset SaAlertEntity but has now returned to normal When you are done click the Save Changes button 132 Anam LV EA m Ge AA Elan C br rax nam a 1 e T o ml m AAA 00 0 78 40 a Ar rear nw seit oem IO AAA 9229 W aterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin X 76756 eL 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 Www rrcode con RECOD Below are two screenshots of the example with the form fields completed and those that changed from the default highlighted LA Asset Manager Thresholds Filter EN Asset Alert Threshold Custom Alert Threshold R Asset Not In Expected Location Thres R Asset Offline Alert Threshold TEST R Gauer Door Open R Jims Test Online Asset Alert Thresh Threshold Schedule R Jims Test Temp Threshold Disabled R Low Battery Alert Threshold Disabler Enabled A Motion Alert Threshold Disabled Alert Severity penca T ired To Acknowledge Alert n Q J id m B Test Door Open ser Required To edge Aler A Voth Door Open Type Of Alert To Create Custom Alert b Alert Man t A woth temperature test Disabled B Aler Viewer E Actions Execution User Account Thresholds Security Third Attribute Third Attribute Value Operator Third Attribute Value Threshold Delay telp Admin Console Prof e admin 133 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Repor
60. contains the Zone Manager component and may be installed on systems that will only run a Zone Manager instance The Asset Manager RPM will install the Asset Manager software and an embedded version of Zone Manager reserved only for Asset Manager Both RPMs may not be installed on the same system at the same time Linux Installation Notes Both RPM installers will install their respective rfcode applications in usr share rfcode RF Code recommends 5GB of disk space be available for usr share rfcode for most installations unless either the Zone Manager event caching feature or the Zone Manager tag event logging feature will be used In these cases additional storage will be needed on a case by case basis depending on the application desired All logging system configuration and temporary files will reside in usr share rfcode Logs are automatically rotated and there is no unbounded growth of the file system Installation of the Zone Manager rpm will install one file outside of usr share rfcode called etc init d rfcassetmanager This is the startup script for the service By default the service will be started upon RPM install and when the operating system is at init 3 init 4 and init 5 and also features a clean shutdown script on init 0 init 1 init 6 and init 2 The rpm file will also add an unprivileged user and group called rfcode that will be used as credentials to run the service This account will not be interactive and its shell will
61. create reports in the BIRT Designer and then add them to Asset Manager where the report will be executed The BIRT module enables a rich variety of features such as custom formatting charts data grouping and logos You can even include data from multiple reports and external data sources to create reports tailored to your specific needs 134 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD Reports In brief Asset Manager Reports are first defined and then run The Manage Reports task lets you create report definitions templates that can be run manually by users or automatically based on a schedule you define Manage Reports The Manage Reports task lets you create Report definitions based on specific criteria Asset Manager provides several predefined reports you can use and customize In addition you can create Consolidated Reports which let you run multiple reports simultaneously so that they can be viewed or exported as a group The following System Reports are available in the Admin Console e Consolidated System Report e Reader Custom Report e Reader Noise Report e Reader Offline Report e Reader Online Report e System Alert Report e User Access Report e Zone Manager Custom Report e Zone Manager Offline Report e Zone Manager Online Report Report definitions can be run ad hoc at any time or they can be scheduled either to run once or according to a def
62. document The Administrator Console The Administrator Console is used to manage the system infrastructure It is used by an administrator to set up a system structure for the purpose of discovering monitoring and tracking your assets that have been tagged with RF Code Active RFID tags The Administrator Console provides or enables the following tasks e Dashboard to configure the primary views for end users of the system e Configuration to configure the parts of the system necessary for viewing and storing tag data e Integration to configure optional modules that integrate with third party hardware and software e Location Rules Maps to configure the logical structure that represents your physical deployment of tags readers and IR locators e Data Schema to configure the types assets and sensors you will be using and the specific attributes of them that are important to you however for most deployments this should not need to be modified Consult with RF Code Support if you think you need to modify the default schema e Security to configure user accounts and access levels in the system e Reports Graphs to configure the presentation of data that is reported from the system e Events to configure the types parameters and triggers of system generated notifications when certain conditions occur so that administrators can manage the hardware and the software of the system e Alert Management much like Event con
63. end of the period or it may reflect the average of the data accumulated during the given period In the latter case which applies to most data collected about power usage where the data reflects the average of the 10 minute period this can cause a delay in the data being presented or reported of up to 10 minutes i e it may take 10 minutes to see any change in the power usage being display e g a stair step jump on power draw and up to 20 minutes before the change actually represents the full snapshot period Again this can happen because it takes up to 10 minutes for the PDU to transmit the data that was collected in the preceding 10 minute interval and Zone Manager waits until it has received all the data before any of it is presented Essentially averaging helps to prevent artificial errors and inconsistencies that would occur as the result of time aliasing and the brief delay in displaying data helps to ensure that it is as accurate as possible 196 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com J1 RFCOD Creating a Custom PDU View Because the Default View does not contain columns to display values for standard PDU power Attributes you will want to create a new view to show these at quick glance NOTE For more about Views refer to the View section in this guide To create a custom PDU View perform the following steps 1 Go to Customization gt
64. graph definition It does not delete the output of graphs that have already been run To delete a graph definition select the appropriate graph from the list and then click the Delete button 154 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Using Actions with Reports and Graphs Actions let you deliver a Report or Graph to one or mote recipients using a specified protocol With Actions you can spawn an email an HTTP post or and FTP transfer when the Report or Graph is run either on a schedule or interactively from the user interface To configure an Action perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Reports Graphs gt Actions 2 Click New and then select an action from the drop down list Email FTP or HTTP or select a pre existing action to edit 3 The settings available in the actions pane enable you to configure the action and vary depending on the Type of Action Configuring Email Actions for Reports and Graphs The following settings are available System Report Graph Action mail Report Graph Action w Basic Information Name Enabled Report Action Configuration Email Address es Email Content Email Subject Line JOB NAME NOTE Those fields with asterisks are required fields e Name The name of the email action e Enabled Check this checkbox to enable the Email Action e Email Address es Specify one or m
65. hot spot target e g environmental conditions for a rack This can be turned off and or modified in the View configuration of the map 162 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Map Views Map Views let you define how you want information in Asset Manager to be displayed visually and also what information will be displayed Basic Information Map Configuration Map Attributes Hot Spot 4 Hover Map Views in the User Console Map Views are available to different Users in the User Console depending on how they are configured in the Admin Console 9 Asset Manager Map View rj Maps dn Map View i 163 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com e Location e Map e View e Attribute e Zoom e Minimum Alert Severity e Attribute Formatting Using Map Views you can change which Attribute will be shown for any particular Hot Spot and whether or not the information will be shown to users by default ot whether the information will remain hidden until a user hovers over it with the mouse pointer 164 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Dashboards The dashboard task is a dynamic indicator of the current health and configuration status of the system The da
66. how strong a reader is reading tag signals It can be an important indicator in deployment areas with a large degree of noise in the environment However if you do need to address environmental noise and are considering making changes to SSI configuration of any reader please contact RF Code Support first Misconfiguring SSI can cause a reader to miss some tag beacons at best and at worst prevent a reader from being able to detect any tag beacons or tags In general you want tag SSI to be 10 dB higher than the noise floor If you need to configure SSI to limit zones the Simple SSI rule is the easiest to use NOTE Adding Tag Groups in the Reader Web Console is only a way to validate that the reader is functioning properly These settings are not saved after the web console session is ended The reader and tag groups must be configured within Asset Manager in a similar way in order for them all to work together within Asset Manager RF Code Tag Group Codes IDs and Treatment Codes All RF Code tags have three 3 distinguishing characteristics regardless of the type model or function of the tag In the example below is an R155 Temperature Humidity Tag Outlined in the following photo in red rectangles are the three 3 characteristics that distinguish this tag and all individual tags from every other tag C RF Code FCC ID P6F2005433 Group Code The Group Code is a 6 letter code Examples of this code are THSRCK LOCATE IRC
67. information I Asset Manager Actions Search lt RF Code Alert Source S SOURCE aName Alert State STATE Alert Severity S SEVERITY Alert Start Time S START_TIME Alert Resolve Time RESOLVE_TIME Alert Description SIDESCRIPTION Alert Value S THRESHOLD ATTRIBUTE 1 SOURCE THRESHOLD VALUE 1 odds ni eel Oe nom n Profile admin A The asset Dell Server 3137 is no longer detected NOTE There are other fields are optional Repeat Alert Action to repeat the email alert Alert Action Repeat Interval to choose the time interval you want the alert email to be repeatedly sent using Alert When Resolved to inform you when the alert is resolved Click the Save Changes button 124 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 10 Click the Thresholds tab under Alert Management 11 In the Asset Alert Threshold window choose Asset Offline Alert Threshold from the drop down menu 12 Scroll down to the Alert Actions field and click the Ellipsis button asui Menager Tarmehents RF Code i s AAPP es 1 Ta c e e m qo Mob 99 6 hes d et oo 13 Double click the alert to move it from Available to the Selected Alert Actions Sele Available cted Filter Filter 14 Click the OK button The Action will then appear in the Alert Actions
68. logging level for various modules within Asset Manager go to the following URL http lt IP Address of Asset Manager gt 6580 ap1 system log com rfcode Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL Parent ALL coma rfcode dao mpl ArtributoClassDaoinpl cons rfcode dao impl EntityDaolmpl com riode dao impl Entin RefHiiton Dsolmpl com rfcode dao impl EnntyTypeDeolmp This link is a page that shows statistics regarding the log level http lt IP Address of Asset Manager gt 6580 api system stats Com Messeste irin Jma timin Tag Everts Handles 6581736 5315 10645 1048 10 323 Tag Exento Queued 6581746 3335 10641 10466 10 377 Meme Valse Cuerem Tack Bunch Sae bo Cunem Task Name com foods 11 range ung Tag U pda Tisk Lam Evert Timestamp LOCAL RANGER 161894 09812 Tw Feb 26 2005 OF CST 2013 Ranger Work Quee Sure 0 Tag Ever Queue Sar to history Meme Cre Manene bem imn Iie Haay Values bated 9333122 B27 13 36 12795 12 535 mberibed atte Inherited Updates Changed III 0 0 0 0001 Ieheried Updates Queved 2229199 191 A786 3 068 1384 219 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD Appendix
69. long running or complex graphs from consuming all available system and database resources NOTE When the time zone is altered on the Asset Manager server some system features may behave unexpectedly scheduled reports alerts etc After changing the time zone reboot Asset Manager to apply the new time zone NOTE If you want to turn off the scheduled Graph while preserving the schedule settings the Enable Schedule checkbox must not be checked however this checkbox must be checked in order for the schedule to take effect Graph Actions The Graph Action section lets you choose an Action if one has been configured using the Actions sub task and a format for the Graph NOTE For more information on configuring Actions for Graphs refer to the Using Actions with Reports and Graphs section To use a configured Graph action perform the following steps 149 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD 1 B 4 Choose an Action Format from the drop down list CSV JSON PDF SQLITE or XML Actions Action Farmat Report Graph Actions CSV JSON PDF SQLITE XML Click the Ellipsis button beneath the Format drop down button The Report Graph Actions window will appeat Report Graph Actions Available Selected Filter x Filter Email Report Graph to Dan s P OK cancel Choose one or mote Report Graph Actions and
70. monitoring solutions Zone Manager handles all of the direct hardware interfaces for RF Code readers and tags Zone Manager is essentially the engine under the hood of Asset Manager and was designed for easy integration with one or more business applications via its open application programming interface API HP Asset Center Connect IT IBM Maximo BMC Remedy Other X 3 Party Platforms Using Open APIs r y E Zone Manager Ks i RF Code Nen Readers 4 m RF Transmission Ju RF Transmission E E ce v E RF Code Tags RF Code Tags Integration with the RF Code middleware location engine known as Zone Manager involves utilizing the communications interfaces defined in the Zone Manager API Specification http support rfcode com customer portal articles 716011 document The Zone Manager interface is extremely flexible and powerful It can be utilized in almost any development environment due to the following characteristics of the Zone Manager API Specification e Telnet or web API based communications e Platform operating system and hardware independent e Programming language independent The Zone Manager software provides a great deal of value and functionality that can be easily leveraged such as e Reader communications channel management for up to thousands of readers e Reader initialization modes and configuration e Data buffering filtering and interpretation e Reduction of duplica
71. of Measure or Server Locale English Metric e Server Time Zone View of the current Time Zone e Asset Security Enabling disabling of Advanced Asset Security e Location Behavior Configuration of default behavior designation for when to place an asset in the Unknown Location location o Never The asset will never be placed in Server the Unknown Location folder o Asset is offline Put the asset in the folder only after it has gone offline o No matching location rules If it s still online but doesn t match any location rules place it in the Unknown Location folder o Asset is offline or no matching location rules Combines the previous two options and if either matches move the asset to Unknown Location BACnet Slave Object IDs License enabled feature Contact RF Code Support Modbus Slave Server License enabled feature Contact RF Code Support Modbus Slave Devices License enabled feature Contact RF Code Support morra AV fo muc bm ERU bro Renn y r C ER SA o0 4 ye 0 p COP TM apr pp pct 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin X 70750 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 WWW ITCOde CO RFCOD Modbus Slave Addresses License enabled feature Contact RF Code Support Locations amp Rules Map Configuration Map Views Location to Asset Association Creating Locations and their associated Rules are built in this section Creating and modifying maps and
72. on the tags matching with a reader that is providing a geophysical position matching a given set coordinates of constraints Rules for Matching by Simple SSI To use the Simple SSI rule name it enable it and accept the default SSI settings unless you have contacted RF Code Support for guidance 5 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com m Rule Configuration Enabled SSI Threshold Minimum Rules for Matching by IR Locator To use the IR Rule name it enable it associate it with the ID of an IR Locator Room or Rack and accept the default Rule Configuration settings unless you have contacted RF Code Support for guidance Rule Configuration Enabled d micat Te a 58 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Summary Assets Overview of Summary Assets In order to understand Summary Assets you need to understand the two parts of the system that are associated when you use Summary Assets Location objects Locations and Asset objects Assets In the simplest definition Locations are places while Assets are objects such as inventory items or environmental sensors A Summary Asset is an asset that is also a location A Summary Asset is essentially an association between a location and an asset By associating locations and assets you can obtain informat
73. or the import will present errors KAI i Asset_Modified_Test csv Microsoft Excel EE File Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View General x E Conditional Formatting 3 Insert E Ry v Format as Table FX Delete gt Sort amp Find amp 58 28 i Cell Styles gt 15 Format E Filter Select Clipboard Ta Font Ta Alignment fa Number Ta Styles Cells Editing type g retired deletable aName Calibri rin BIU AxKx 2 entity SERVER FALSE TRUE TestServer1 RCKIRCO0503491 42 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Add the rest of your tags and their attributes to the spreadsheet NOTE You must leave the guid field blank empty when adding new tags and their attributes The guid is a unique asset sensot identifier that is automatically assigned by Asset manager to each asset or sensor NOTE The values you assigned to both the aName and the aAssetTag attributes must be unique for each and every asset or sensor Importing Assets To import assets perform the following steps 1 2 Under Assets Import Assets Browse to find the spreadsheet and then click the Upload button to import the new spreadsheet eS Asset Manager Import Assets Select the asset file to import hi ile Select import file a Da d Asset File imp fi e a Tag Management g Customization E 6 Assets Submitter
74. pet Rack Mm Rack Asset Rack 148 w 300 0 V Na POU Detads e y ew Integrating with ServerTech s Sentry Power Manager SPM Asset Manager is tightly integrated with ServerTech s SPM to enable PDU CDU power and sensor data from SPM to flow to Asset Manager SPM integration functionality is enabled by entering a valid license key into Asset Manager and does not require any additional software to be installed License keys can be purchased from your RF Code representative Configuring Asset Manager to integrate with Sentry Power Manager is a simple process 1 Install and configure Sentry Power Manager PDU s must be added to SPM using the standard SPM capabilities For support on configuring SPM and adding PDUs please contact Server Technology at www servertech com 2 Add the Sentry Power Manager to Asset Manager as a data source 3 Add the SPMCDU tag group to the Asset Manager configuration Tag Group configuration Adding the SPM server to Asset Manager is similar to adding a reader to Asset Manager Adding PDU sensor attributes is similar to adding PDU tags to Asset Manager In the Asset Manager Admin Console go to the Configuration gt Readers task and click the New button Fill in the following fields Name Enter a Name for the SPM server Zone Manager choose Local Zone Manager A Enabled select the Enabled box Hostname enter the hostname or IP address of the SPM server Port select port 80
75. primary server is unsuccessful optional e Secondary Port Select the Port over which to communicate with the secondary FTP server e Username Enter the username for connecting with the FTP server e Password Enter the password for connecting with the FTP server e Confirm Password To confirm it enter the password again e Data Connection Mode Select Active or Passive FTP only e Additional Attributes Select the additional attributes you would like to publish for the event Configuration Settings for HTTP Post Alert Actions The following settings are available when configuring HTTP Post Alert Actions 9 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Event Action Configuration Primary HTTP URL Secondary HTTP URL SSL Do not use SSL HTTP Username HTTP Password VIII Confirm Password DIITTITIIITITTTTTTI Additional Event Information Additional Attributes Name Asset Location Description e Primary HTTP URL Specify the URL that you would like to post the report to e Secondary HTTP URL Input the hostname of the secondary server to post to optional e SSL Select if you would like to use SSL and if so whether or not to require the SSL certificate of the host to be from a trusted authority e HTTP Username This is the HTTP login username e HTTP Password This is the HTTP login password e Confirm Pa
76. refer to the Prerequisite Reader Configuration section found earlier in this document Before you have configured any readers in Asset Manager the Admin Console Dashboard will show a red X next to Reader s under System Configuration Foai Asset Manager Administration Dashboard J Dashboard Users Online Filter 3 Administrator 1 Logged In Component Configured i E admin 10 1 9 131 Database Connection Zone Manager s BA System Status ger s Reader s Tag Group s License Key s Reader Configuration in Asset Manager is done in the Reader Configuration task area There you will see two task panes In the center column is a tree of readers installed and configured in Asset Manager which will be empty at first and on the right is the task pane where reader configuration information is entered To configure a reader perform the following steps 1 Inthe Admin Console navigate to Configuration gt Readers 31 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 2 Inthe Readers configuration screen click the New button and select the reader type from the drop down list deal Asset Manager Administration Readers de L Te Jo e gt In PEED Reader D200 Reader J200 Reader M200 Reader M240 Reader M250 Reader R200 Reader o S Configuration 4 Database T License Keys 3 SMTP Server Import Configuration 4 Export
77. report it is NOTE For more information about Advanced Reporting with BIRT refer to the RF Code website http www rfcode com Software advanced reporting module html The Basic Information section also has a checkbox Create output only if data exists When this is checked the Asset Manager system will only create report output if there is representative data in the database for the conditions that you have specified This prevents the system from generating reports that have no data rows 138 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD If the checkbox is checked and you do try to run a report without data you will see a pop up window like the following undefined Output gt Rack Doors Opened within Past 24 Hours 2013 04 10 15 43 44 Contains No Data Security The Execution User Account when used in conjunction with Admin Security can limit report execution to authorized users The default value of Admin is appropriate for most situations Time The Time section for Reports lets you set specific or relative times or time ranges for reports NOTE If you change the time zone on the Asset Manager server some system features may behave unexpectedly scheduled reports alerts etc After changing the time zone you must reboot the Asset Manager server so that the time change is detected by Asset Manager The following Types of report time defini
78. server NOTE For information regarding how to integrate your Modbus system please refer to your Modbus manuals or refer to the Modbus website http www modbus org 212 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Integrating with NetBotz The integration of RF Code sensors with the APC NetBotz solution utilizes the NetBotz Pod Sharing capabilities native to Version 2 amp Version 3 NetBotz appliances When deployed the integration will look logically like the following screenshot APC infrastruXure Central RF Code Reader RF Code Reader ntu Tram mn 019 ss Tram e EEEE he E Fw amp E ee amp RF Code Sensor Tage RF Code Sensor Tags Tere Marrida Doo DC Fue DO Terme Humidity Door OC Fetal The RF Code integration with the APC NetBotz solution supports the following RF Code Sensor Tags e R120 Door Sensor Tag e R130 Dry Contact Sensor Tag e R135 Fluid Sensor Tag e R150 Temperature Sensor Tag e R155 Temperature Humidity Sensor Tag 213 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD To integrate NetBotz with Asset Manager perform the following steps 1 Navigate to the NetBotz Advanced View for the V2 and V3 appliances A gt Muere Ba AS 2 Estee Meee e Asten rn MR e leaperamarw W Dunne tag momen rie PL See 8 013 m
79. server NOTE If you are running Asset Manager in a Linux environment and need more information about how to restart the service refer to Linux Installation section of this document 3 Next go to Integration gt JMX Monitor 3 Asset Manager Administration JMX Monitor Basic Information Dashboard ee ia ga S Configuration Network Settings E Integration Hostname localhost 24 JMX Monitor Port 3686 3 JMX Domains BACnet Slave Server 4 Check the Enabled checkbox 5 Enter the Hostname of the server running the JM X software 6 Enter the Port TCP IP that Asset Manager will use to communicate with the JMX software 7 Click Save Changes JMX Domains A JMX Domain is an organization of information objects and attributes which will be published via JMX Asset Manager automatically loads a default schema as part of its installation routine Typically no changes are needed to be made to the JMX Domains if you are using the default Asset Manager Schema The JMX Domains included with Asset Manager are as follows e Door Sensors door position information e Dry Contact Sensors dry contact position information e Environmental Sensors temperature amp humidity information 202 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD e Fluid Sensors fluid detection information e Readers status information about RF Code network based
80. set to config status Set by Asset Manager and not a user Used for status values set by Asset Manager which are visible to a user For example the motion value of a tag is determined by the Asset Manager and not a user Used only by Zone Manager The ZName is an alias which points to Zone Manager s name for this attribute For example in Asset Manager the attribute may have the GUID of aHost while in Zone Manager the attribute is called host In this case the ZName value is host Attribute Class Data Types a single date such as December 22 2011 double 8 bytes IEEE 754 Covers a range from 4 94065645841246544e 324d to 1 79769313486231570e 308d entityref A reference to an entity object This is a simple association The entity with this attribute does not inherit its entity referenced attributes 259 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD entityref list A list of references to entity objects This is a simple association The entity with this attribute does not inherit its entity referenced attributes enum An enumeration The value of an attribute of this type is one of the values listed in the attribute class values property long 8 bytes signed two s complement Ranges from 9 223 372 036 854 775 808 to 9 223 372 036 854 775 807 map A hash table of values A map must contain a _ mapkeytype an
81. system will be up and running Method B This method uses SQL Service Windows Authentication d 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd In your Database Management Application create a New Database in SQL server and from the DOMAIN accounts select a user and grant that user access to the new database On a computer that is a member of the domain install Asset Manager NOTE Do not check the Install SQL Express checkbox After Asset Manager is installed shut down the Asset Manager service Then under the Log On tab change the Log on as entry from Local System Account to This account and select the domain user that was granted full rights on the new database Enter the uset s password and click OK The user will be granted log on as a service rights Start the service and login as admin admin Enter the database type and hostname of the database server and check the Use Windows Authentication checkbox NOTE Do not enter a username or password Test the connection and make sure that it passes Click OK The software will reboot and after 3 5 minutes the database will be populated and the software will be back online To check this go to the Asset Manager web console page and log in 19 Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RI COD AM Directory Structure and Files Present after Windows Installation After installing Asset Manager the directory structur
82. the Test button to ensure that the configuration works 5 Click the Save button if the test succeeds if not troubleshoot the configuration 92 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD Events The Events task lets you set conditions that spawn notifications about conditions within Asset Manager When information changes in a way that satisfies these conditions the Events sub system sends a notification to Users or to applications outside of Asset Manager that have been configured to receive them Events do not need to have a beginning and end for notifications instead Events use Triggers that cause notifications to be sent All Events have two basic components Event Actions and Event Triggers Event Actions The Actions sub task allows the Administrator or Users to create various notification actions for the Asset Manager system Event Actions include all of the following types Email Event Actions File Transfer Event Actions HTTP Post Event Actions Logging Event Actions SNMP V1 Trap Event Actions and SNMP V3 Event Actions Creating Event Actions To create a new Event Action perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Events gt Actions and the Actions task pane will appear on the right The Actions task pane is divided into two sections the list of defined actions on the left and the Actions Editor on the right At the top of the task
83. the circled hot spot and its respective settings highlighted in yellow in the lower left frame Wot Spot Tools nko a a See Be S if ym TA bess bossa babas O 161 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD In this next example a Hot Spot has been created for a different rack but instead of allowing a click through to the individual rack location this Hot Spot shows the average intake temperature of the rack as a whole This is done by pointing to the Summary Asset for the rack because by default the Summary Asset provides an aggregate of all sensor readings associated with the rack FA Asset Manager Administration Map Configuration nO E omm ee ee E Som AS ee HE emend Larfiguratiun Z inteeratum My eae Roles taps A Locations amp aas Di Map Corfigarater V3 wap veros Y Loan lo 195 detto bn After the map is saved switch over to the User Console and navigate to Maps Navigate to the desired map using the Location pull down menu Within that location you can choose a specific map from the Map pull down menu The other options available to you allow you to change the View Attribute and or Attribute Formatting For more information about conditional formatting based on Attributes refer to the Attribute Formatting section Hovering over the respective hot spots in the map view will reveal additional information about the
84. the size of your database the backup migration may take some time 3 On the Asset Manager server run the installer from the unzipped image 4 Login to Asset Manager and confirm that all of your settings are configured as they were and all your data is there Migrating the Asset Manager Server Application Sometimes it is necessary to change the hardware or operating system that an Asset Manager is running on Hard ware may need to be upgraded to handle an increased load of users or assets or a hardware failure may need to be recovered from The following procedure can be used to migrate the instance of Asset Manager from one Server to another if the database is housed on a separate system If the database resides on the same Server as the Asset Manager as is the case when SQL Express is used then the local database will have to be backed up and restored on the new hardware using the vendor s database tools prior to executing this procedure 1 Ifthe old Asset Manager system is still running allow it to continue running until step 6 This may also be a good opportunity to execute a backup of the database prior to switching over 2 Make sure database credentials are handy or copy the system properties file for use on the new system 3 Install Asset Manager on the new hardware but do not check on the Install SQL Express box 4 When the installation is complete log into the new Asset Manager The database configuration dialog should
85. the user ID and password for your server if you have one and confirm it e Authentication Protocol Select None SHA 1 or MD5 by default this is set to SHA 1 e Additional Attributes Select the additional attributes you would like to publish for the event e Engine ID Within an administrative domain an SNMP Engine ID is the unique and unambiguous identifier of an SNMP engine Since there is a one to one association between SNMP engines and SNMP entities it also uniquely and unambiguously identifies the SNMP entity Enter the SNMP Engine ID if applicable e Context Engine ID Within an administrative domain a contextEngineID uniquely identifies an SNMP entity that may realize an instance of a context with a particular contextName Enter the SNMP Context Engine ID if applicable e Context Name A contextName is used to name a context Each contextName MUST be unique within an SNMP entity Enter a Context Name if applicable e Encryption Protocol Select None DES or AES 128 as encryption protocol Encryption Password Confirm Enter the encryption password and confirm it NOTE For more about SNMP trap formatting refer to the SNMP Trap Formatting section NOTE The RF Code MIB file can be found in the mib directory under Asset Manager s installation directory Configuring Serial Device Send Alert Actions The configuration settings specific to Serial Device Send Alerts are the following NOTE Serial Device Send Alerts
86. unique within an SNMP entity Enter a Context Name if applicable e Encryption Protocol Select None DES or AES 128 as encryption protocol e Encryption Password Confirm Enter the encryption password and confirm it NOTE The RF Code MIB file can be found in the mib directory with the Asset Manager installation directory in Windows or on the RF Code Support website http support rfcode com customer portal articles 716055 Copying Event Actions To copy an event action perform the following steps 1 Click the Copy button NOTE By default the Name of the new Event Action is Copy of Name of Action Copied 2 Enter or change any additional settings 3 Click the Save Changes button Testing Event Actions To test an event action select an action from the list and then click the Test button NOTE For trap actions not inform actions the Test button only tests that the Asset Manager system sent the trap Administrators will need to verify at the target host in order to know if the trap was successfully received Deleting Event Actions To delete an action select an action from the list and then click the Delete button 101 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com m w RECOD Event Triggers For Events the Triggers sub task lets you create a triggering event s for the various event actions that have been configured for the Asset Ma
87. values for their power related Attributes go to Assets gt Manage Assets and choose the new view from the View drop down menu Qi Asset Manager Manage Assets Search RF Tyge Locaton Stats Arbre Operate IT Asset w AutnData Ces w Active x Asael Location PIG Active Power PON Apparent Power POU Draconnecteg POU Daconn Austin Osa Center famin Ota Carter Awstn Data Carter Asahin Dwta Carter NOTE Depending on the number of Assets in your system you may have too many Assets listed to see any PDUs on the screen and the PDU Attributes in the PDU View may not be relevant To shorten the list restrict the list with the Type filter to show only PDUs 198 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD dy Asset Manager Manage Assets same Jo ala Dashboard Type Location Status Jg PDU Y Austin Data Cer V Active a Tag Management H 30 Asset y Q Inventory 3 Q Sensor A Assets Q Differential Pressure Q Door Q Dry Contact Q Fluid Q PDU Q PDU Breaker Customization do Manage Assets do Manage Assets By Location de Manage Assets By Type amp 5 import Assets Asset Builder Jobs The Manage Assets list will then show after being restricted by the View and the Filter only PDU assets eb Asset Manager Manage Assets w Aun Daa Cen w Ache lame Asset AssetLoca on POU Actve Power POY Apparent Power POU Discomne ce
88. 0 1 1 7 The third attribute value index 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 1 8 The third attribute value GUID 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 200 1 1 9 The third attribute value 252 e 8758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 7 RF COD Exporting and Importing There are three types of things that can be exported from and imported to Asset Manager These are the data schema the system configuration and assets with their attributes The first two the schema and system configuration can only be exported or imported by an administrator Assets can be exported and imported by both an administrator and users with roles that permit the function Both the System Configuration and the Schema Configuration export functions are accessible from the Admin Console in the Configuration gt Export Configuration menu By default all of the system configuration variable checkboxes are checked except for Binary Data and will be exported in a single file when the Export Configuration button is clicked The format of the exported file can be either JSON with a JavaScript Object Notation js file type extension or CSV a Comma Separated Value file type However if Binary Data is also exported by checking the checkbox next to it then the export file will download as a compressed ZIP file this happens because the binary data being exported as maps or other image files is packaged with the text
89. 012 11 14 2012 11 14 dn 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD 4 Select the appropriate Asset Type to assign to the tag NOTE In this example a server asset is being added therefore Server is chosen as the Asset Type NOTE As mentioned previously Server and the other Inventory Assets seen in the Location Hierarchy below are only available after they have been manually created or after one of the Default Schemas has been imported Create Asset Asset Template Or Gm Asset 38 Inventory c li IT Equipment 3 8 Computer di Desktop db Laptop de Server de Tablet t i Monitor 986 Network Equipment 3j d Other IT Equipment Printer 30 Office Equipment dl Other Equipment d Person 5 Configure at minimum the following asset fields e Name This is a common description of the Asset and it must be unique One common practice for naming sensors is to pre pend a sensor tag type designator e g TempHum or TH to a description of that asset s physical and or logical location e g AustinDataCenterRow1 Rack1 Top such that the name reflects both e g H AustinDataCenterRow1 Rack1 Top e Asset Tag Depending on how you navigated to this screen this field may already be pre populated If is not simply start typing the unique ID of the tag and you will be able to select the specific Tag ID from the list that is presented
90. 10 digits with each number used leaving adequate space for future expansion without having to re number all of the Asset Attributes 2 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 4 Inthe Asset Type editor area of the task pane the second section titled Attributes lists the attributes that have been added to the selected Asset Type Name and Description Description Tablet PCs e g iPad and other touchscreen devices ID Parent Attributes NOTE For new Asset Types the list of Attributes will be empty 3 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 5 To add an Attribute click the Add button The Add Attribute window will appear m Attributes mter 0 x di Activation Count 1 di Activation Count 2 di Activation Input 1 di Activation Input 2 Category Basic Information Ps wr Field Order Value Required Static Default Value 6 From the Add Attribute window chose an Attribute e g Screen Size 4 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 7 Chose a category from the drop down menu or create a new one as a container for the new Attribute NOTE The Category is simply an arbitrary group of similar Attributes e g Computer De
91. 13 04 01 02 00 00 depor csv Stop Time 2013 04 09 12 54 49 2013 04 09 12 54 49 2013 04 09 12 54 49 2013 04 09 12 54 49 2013 04 09 12 54 49 DC Demo Reader PDU Demo Reader PDU Demo Reader2 PDU Demo Reader3 PDU Demo Reader4 Page 1 of 1 hi a Creating Report Template Definitions To create a new report perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Reports Graphs gt Manage Reports Noise Floor Channel A Noise Floor Channel B 115 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 115 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm k Displaying 1 5 of 5 The Manage Reports task pane will appear on the right and is divided into two sections the list of defined reports on the left and the Editor on the right At the top of the task pane are several buttons New Copy Delete Run Report Run and View Report New Folder Edit Folder and Delete Folder Filter System Report iu Run and View Report BE New Folder Edit Folder amp 9 Delete Folder wr 2 To create a folder or folders for the various report definitions you are be creating click the New Folder button A dialog box will appear 3 Type ina name for the new folder and then click the Create Folder button New Folder Please enter folder name California Data Center The new folder will appear in the data tree on the left Fan ss es 33 Test Folder 373 Austin Data Center a Ausin Readers California Data Canter NOTE To edit the fol
92. 2 11 14 r Le Reports Graphs 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 E Events z 3n17 44 14 h Alert Management 2 4 480f48 Rows 20 Environmental Monitoring with Sensor Tag Assets Using RF Code sensor tags you can monitor temperature humidity and other environmental conditions When you configure Asset x 2 Warranty Term months Warranty Expiration Date About Help Admin Console Manager to use sensors you will be adding the sensors as Assets and designating a location for each one of them For example you can add a temperature sensor as an asset tied to a specific location in your data center e g to Row 1 Rack 1 Additionally with sensor tags you can also configure the following three 3 additional fields e Temperature Sensor Application This pull down allows the software to designate how this sensor is deployed e g IT Cabinet Rack e Airflow Position This field designates if the sensor is in the front or back of the cabinet rack e g Intake would be the front e Rack Position Designates the Top Middle or Bottom placement of the sensor on the front of the rack door Additional Sensor Information Temperature Sensor Application 9 IT Rack Sensor X w Rack Position x ow Managing RCI and RTI with Temperature Sensors When you use temperature and temperature humidity tags you can monitor RTI and RCI metrics in order to determine your level of compliance to ASHRAE standards RF Cod
93. 2 ZM Updates Channel Optional integration interface To set up the Linux iptables firewall to allow these ports through the following commands need to be issued with root privileges iptables I INPUT p tcp dport 6580 ACCEPT iptables I INPUT p tcp dport 6581 ACCEPT iptables I INPUT p tcp dport 6503 ACCEPT iptables I INPUT p tcp dport 6502 ACCEPT service iptables save These commands will create the rules and save them so that they are persistent after rebooting 22 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com T CODZ AM Directory Structure and Files Present after Linux Installation After installing Asset Manager in a Linux environment the directory structure will look like the following Hy H T En Cn CT F H i LA I R35 FR amp 5 r En LIT L ha H T I 1 ti p i Ln A A LI i H T H 4 I e ei I I R35 Pa Pda b nm la a O L LO LEI LEI da lg En C oF ECT 0 H J D aF T I Installing in Linux with a PostgreSQL Database If you wish to install Asset Manager in a Linux environment using PostgreSQL for your database you will need to install PostgreSQL and configure Asset Manager to point to it by using the settings under Configuration gt Database For more information about PostgreSQL refer to the third party website http www posteresqLoreg
94. 3 LIA Seve Cono a a pulir g ed aoe ns setool ippo 183 DES EE 0151 a A A II eee emer errr 186 Statistical Compia non E 86 sesasi n E E S S cued rear iria 189 E AAA UU EU E E M t 189 PaE A a d E A E er nm eee 191 Intesratine with RE Code IR LOCators E w 0 0 0 S 4 n nS 0 0 SSn0 n0n04n40S0S X X MM 193 Intestatino with PDUS and COUS ia SAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA AAA EE RE UIN EP Cp NIME UNDE 194 Usne RF Oo clone Tags with POUS a0d CDUS oua tepida Ubi e anii aiii 194 Tastan POU CDL o A e E A 194 ddae POU COC eaor T A REO 194 Canora Coston PDU A o ESE o O AEE AEE EED Ei EEN EENEN 197 Integrating with ServerIech s Sentry Power Manager SPM i uie stein seen snis on uet pa Sae ot os na ena Eu Sat un haeo a 199 i Ar nr IA um cz m j pa e i MAP ESL C r C m J P ds mmr rt 8 c e A PU TE TV ong en ppp 9229 W aterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin IX 70750 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 WWW rcoae com RFCOD Intesratine with JMX BACnet Modbus and INetDOIZ ntc id Eat etus inr atoms sido bhi BD AAN Po Ro N ree Cr er Te E TT INES Mon EE A EAA T A E gia 202 IDA eE io A A E E ames 202 E a E Grace E E E E A eer E A E E eee E E E E ENS A PP m 205 ti 0d AAA O 206 Intesa IOUS T Mod Dus a a A TE PO PEPE OO II m 207 Modbus
95. 8 admin Location Created Data Center Row 1 2013 05 21 07 47 08 admin Location Created Data Center 2013 05 2107 40 21 admin Dashboard Modified System Dashboard System Status StSystemDashboard_DEFAULT 2013 05 21 07 40 12 i Dashboard Unretired System Dashboard System Status t amp ystemDashboard DEFALILT 2013 05 21 07 37 13 i License Key Created License Key StLicenseKey ecadfesade 0c5198 2013 05 21 07 36 35 i Tag Group Created Treatment 04V Tag Group HUMRCK Sz7TagGroup_mantis04V_b14eca1d99c3ada9 From To 05 21 2013 CA 10 00 AM 05 21 2013 3 10 00 AM Event Time User Description Export to file 05 21 2013 E Integrating with LDAP Active Directory The following instructions will help you to configure Asset Manager to connect to an Active Directory or other LDAP server running on Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 or Windows Server 2012 NOTE As of Asset Manager v2 8 access to Asset Manager can now be granted based on LDAP Group membership This means that users that have never logged into Asset Manager can do so without an Admin explicitly creating a User account Instead an Administrator can grant access to Asset Manager to an entire LDAP User Group e g Asset Managers Thus a new employee to the company can be granted membership to that User Group and therefore be granted login rights based solely on Group membership without any additional
96. 9 www rfcode com RFCOD e toser 101 Relay 1 e toser 102 Relay 2 e toser 103 Relays 1 amp 2 e toser 104 Relay 3 Els e toser r001 Relay 1 off Patlite RS 232C Commands The commands below can be used when configuring Serial Action Alerts with the Patlite RS 232C NOTE Multiple commands MUST be separated by a space each toset 120 red light blink toser 001 red light off toser 977101 red light solid toser 177102 yellow solid toser 077103 yellow amp red solid toser 077104 green solid toser 077105 red amp green solid toser 077106 yellow amp green solid toser 0772107 yellow amp green amp red solid toser 97108 toser 077110 slow seep toser 1721301 red blink amp slow beep O eee Turns ALL lights and sounds OFF 115 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD The example to the left has Serial Message on Open set to stoser 001 toser 180 toser 001 is used to turn the red light off and is required to get any non red lights to illuminate toser 180 is used to set the green light to blink Serial Message on Resolve is set to toser 0 72 70 This command turns all sounds and lights OFF How to Set Up a Humidity Alert Email for Existing Temperature and or Humidity Tags To set up a humidity alert e mai
97. 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Adwanced 551 Change Threshold 551 Cutoff Channel A SSI Cutoff Channel B dam Tag Age Out Time seconds Tag Age Out Time Channel A seconds Tag Age Out Time Channel B seconds 49 49 lt gt i Tag Age Out Time Reader Offline seconds Ph Tag Age In Count Channel Bias Channel A dBm Channel Bias Channel B dBm Report Tag Controller Events Join Reader Channels Merge Reader Channels Fault In Mask Fault In Value lt gt lt gt S Change Ignore Mask Advanced Settings e SSI Change Threshold lt min ssi change gt is a parameter that allows messages that report small Signal Strength Indicator SSI value changes to be treated as unchanged Any message where all the SSI values reported ate lt min ssi change gt or less dBm different from the previously reported message will be considered to have not changed The default value is 3 e SSI Cutoff Channel A B Sets the channel SSI threshold to the respective dBm fixed threshold value RF Code reader limitation is 41 to 115 dB This feature is used to reduce the effective read range of a reader For example entering a value of 68 for channel A and B will cause tags that are read at 68dB or less to not be reported In general tags that are further away from a reader have lower SSI
98. 99 www rfcode com RECOD 10 Set the Alert Filter so that all temperature sensors in the RFC Data Center are monitored This is a convenient way of setting a threshold on multiple sensors at one time for a given location which let you receive an alert any time a sensor reads a temperature that is greater than the threshold you set Alert Filter Threshold Fiter Asset Type Threshold Fiter Location Threshold Fiter Attribute Threshold Fiter Attribute Value Operator Threshold Fitter Attribute Value 11 Pick the Email Frank Alert Action An email like the one below will be sent to Frank when any temperature sensor in a particular data center location e g RFC Data Center reads greater than 80 degrees norepiyDricods com Frenk Subject Alert Started Row 1 Temp Humidity Threshold Rack too hot ees n ASS Mow 3 gt emp FDA Y Alert Source Row 1 Temp Humidity Alert State Open Alert Severity Warning Alert Start Time 4 11 18 PM CST Alert Description Temperature alert has been detected for asset Row 1 Temp Humidity Temperature 81 5 Fahrenheit Additional Alert Source Information Asset Location RFC Row 1 Description Temp Humidity Sensor Tag for Row in RFC Data Center Name Row 1 Temp Humidity Temperature 81 5 Fahrenheit To view or manage the alert visit 4M 6580 user jsptview user alert view NOTE Alert thresholds and email notifications can be set up for other sensors s
99. ATION FILTER_TYPE HOUR ID MILLISECOND MINUTE MONTH RESOLVE TIME SECOND SEVERITY SOURCE attribute SOURCE ID SOURCE THRESHOLD V SOURCE THRESHOLD V SOURCE THRESHOLD Y START_TIME STATE THRESHOLD ATTRIBUT THRESHOLD ATTRIBUT THRESHOLD ATTRIBUT THRESHOLD ATTRIBUT THRESHOLD ATTRIBUT THRESHOLD ATTRIBUT THRESHOLD ID THRESHOLD NAME THRESHOLD OPERATOR THRESHOLD OPERATOR THRESHOLD OPERATOR THRESHOLD TYPE THRESHOLD VALUE THRESHOLD VALUE THRESHOLD VALUE TIME TIMESTAMP TIMEZONE OFFSET URL YEAR 5 The current date year month day The current day of the month 2 digits The threshold start or resolve message The thresholds filter location The thresholds filter asset type The current hour of the day 2 digits 24 hour Alert ID The current milliseconds of the second 3 digits The current minute of the hour 2 digits The current month 2 digits January 701 Alert resolve time The current second of the minute 2 digits Alert severity Value of an attribute from the source of the alert eg HSOURCE COLOR ID of the source which triggered the alert The actual value from the source of the alert for the first threshold attribute The actual value from the source of the alert for the second threshold attribute The actual value from the source of the alert for the third threshold attribute Alert start time The state of the alert ie open acknowledged re
100. AY TIME HOUR MINUTE SECOND MILLISECOND TIMEZONE_OFFSET Calculations and Functions Matrix Below is a table of the common functions available for use within the Asset Manager software Asset Manager functions are used in a similar way to the functions in the Microsoft Excel application Count Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous Miscellaneous abs valve binom n 1 changed attribute current optional initial value Current value of attribute argument is initial value filter attribute operator if cond trueval falseval If condition value if true value if false of a value specified in the list nod x y previous attribute default value default value is supplied argument is attribute T signum value sart value ceil value Floor value A round value round value decimal Su Time x z day date dayofweek date Pi of week Sunday 1 Monday 2 etc given a ate dayofyear date Day of yeat given a date days date Days since epoch given a date month date Month of year January 1 etc given a date 24 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD T year date Und update target attribute value 4 ib Uum or update asset reference target
101. Actions section is now configured Actions Acton Format PDF Report Graph Actions Email Report Graph to Dan 141 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Report Filters Post Conditions Exception Conditions and Columns Settings The last four 4 sections available when configuring Report Definitions are shown below Filter Filter Type Reader First Attribute First Attribute Value Operator First Attribute Value Second Attribute Second Attribute Value Operator Second Attribute Value Post Condition Attribute Attribute Value Operator Attribute Value Exception Condition Exception Attributes Name Noise Floor Channel A Noise Floor Channel B Report Filter and Post Conditions The Filter and Post Condition sections define the criteria that must be met in order for a row of data to be included in a report NOTE If you leave the Filter and Post Condition sections empty all rows related to the type and time specified in the report configuration will be included Both the filter and the post condition are configured by selecting at least one Attribute a Value Operator and a Value For example you could choose to filter out reader noise values in a report for those readers that are offline for any or all of a report time range with the following configuration e Attribute Online Status e Operator Ha
102. Admin Console and User Console Task Overview The following tables provide a high level overview of the Tasks and Sub Tasks 1 e the features and functionality available within both the Admin Console and the User Console Admin Console Task and Sub Task Matrix Dashboard Configuration of System Status Dashboards Provides high level visibility to the condition of the Asset Manager system configuration active logins Zone Manager System Status status and Reader status eee ee Settings for pointing the Asset Manager server application to your Asset Manager database instance and server Configuration of license keys to enable you to add more resources to or features within Asset Manager SMTP Server Settings for configuring your mail and messaging system Import Configuration Export Configuration Tag Groups Zone Manager Status Reader Firmware Options for importing system tag eroup reader location and or tule configuration from another or previous instance of Asset Manager Settings to enable the export of your system configuration and or schema including SMTP Zone Manager Readers Tag Groups Locations amp Rules Users Alert Actions amp Alert Thresholds Asset Templates amp Views Dashboards Folders Maps amp Map Views Reports Graphs amp Actions Events Triggers amp Actions Integration Binary Data Format and Schema This is where the different types of sensor and as
103. All Programs gt RF Code gt Reader Configuration Utility gt RF Code Reader Configuration Utility to launch the application After launching the application the main screen appears 2 Click Network and then click Next to begin the setup NOTE The Network setup option is used to configure a reader that is connected to a network by means of an Ethernet connection this setup option is generally used for production environments particularly in data centers where one or more readers will be mounted above server tows The Local setup option is used to configure a reader that is connected to your PC by an RS 232 serial cable or a USB cable this setup option is generally used only for smaller deployments and or the initial configuration of the reader and is described in the Reader Configuration Utility 224 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD User Guide This manual only contains basic configuration instructions using the Network option The main setup screen will open and at the top is a Reader Address field to enter the IP address of a reader NOTE Initially this field displays the factory default IP address 192 168 1 129 assigned to all readers Click the Connect button to connect to the reader NOTE Network settings are grayed out during a connection attempt If necessary choose the Stop button to terminate a connection attempt if the reader ca
104. Allocating Memory to Asset Manager By default the amount of memory that is allocated to the Asset Manager software is configured for relatively small deployments For many installations this amount of memory is sufficient however if the number of assets exceeds roughly 5 000 or the calculated field function is heavily used additional memory resource may need to be allocated to maintain good performance characteristics Adding physical memory to the server that runs Asset Manager may help if swapping is experienced but to fully utilize the free memory the software must be defined to allow Asset Manager to use more memory than the default To change the amount of memory being used by Asset Manager edit the system properties file and change the value of the memory directive The following example sets the memory footprint to 2 GB or 2048 MB of memory wrapper java maxmemory 2048 Backing Up and Restoring the Asset Manager Database As with any database you should make periodic backups of the Asset Manager database Backup and Restore with SQL Server If you are housing the Asset Manager database in Microsoft SQL Server follow your standard SQL backup and restore procedure to backup and restore Asset Manager Database Backup and Restore without Microsoft SQL Management Studio It may be necessary to backup and or restore an RF Code SQL database without the ability to use the SQL Management Studio In this case you can use the following SQL com
105. Configuration amp Tag Groups lg Zone Managers Ly Zone Manager Status hal Readers kml Reader Firmware The Reader Configuration settings will appear in the right pane Reader M250 Reader Basic Information Name rf codedb1db6 Zone Manager Local Zone Manager Description M250 Reader Test Engineering Enabled Network Settings e 192 168 1 129 Port 3 Set the Basic and Network configuration settings for the reader e Reader Choose the type of reader you wish to configure from the drop down list e Name Create a name for the reader e Zone Manager Choose the Zone Manager that you would like to assign your reader to by default this 1s your local Zone Manager e Description Enter a description for this Reader 32 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD e Enabled If you would like your reader to go active and receive and transmit tag data after saving your configuration check this box e Hostname Enter the IP address of your reader in this field e Port Enter the port number over which to communicate with your reader by default this is 6500 e SSL Mode Select OFF to turn SSL mode off on the reader IFAVAIL uses SSL on the reader if available REQUIRED requires use of SSL or STRICT will authenticate the matching hostname if the hostname does not match the reader will not c
106. DU Outlet PDU Phase Temperature Humidity Summary Location B Campus gt Building e Floor o Zone Room B Country gt State or Province e City B IT Area gt Computing Facility e Data Center e IT Room e Wiring Closet gt CRAC Unit Rack gt Row of Racks y The schema contains the following Asset Attributes e Airflow Position e Asset Lifecycle Tracking e Asset Purchase Order document e Building Environmental Monitoring e CRAC Airflow Position e CRAC Cooling Capacity e Color e Desktop Form Factor e Equipment Power Outlet 1 e Equipment Power Outlet 2 e Equipment Power Outlet 3 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 239 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD e Equipment Power Outlet 4 e Expected Service Life Years e Include Asset Information e IT Environmental Monitoring e MAC Address xx xx xx xx xx xx e Manufacturer e Model e Monitor Power via PDU e Operating System e Outlet e PCI Slots quantity e Processor e Projector Resolution e Purchase Date e Purchase Terms e Purchase Value e Rack Capacity Monitoring e Rack Environmental Monitoring e Rack Equipment Form Factor e Rack PDU 1 e Rack PDU 2 e Rack Position e Rack Power Capacity e Rack Power Monitoring e Rack U Space Capacity e Rack Weight Capacity e RAM Amount GB e Row Capacity Monitoring e Row Environmental Monitoring e Row Po
107. Inherit Attributes If this attribute class s type is type ref then entities will inherit the value of the attribute defined on the entity type 258 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com Sul RFCOD Constraint One or more constraints on the value of attributes of this class Double and long data types can be constrained by a minimum or maximum value A string password or string list can be constrained using a regular expression A typeref typeref list entityref and entityref list values can be constrained by an Entity Type For example a user may constrain a location attribute to only values within the Texas Entity Type hierarchy Encoding The type of encoding for a password attribute class Blowfish and SHA 512 are suppotted Type The data type for values of this attribute class See the table below for the list of data types Use One of the following strings info Set by Asset Manager and not a user Used for informational values such as the version of an application which are visible to a user hidden Set by Asset Manager and not a user These values are not shown to a user Asset Manager uses hidden values to associated metadata required to interact with an entity For example associating the tag type of a tag with a tag entity config Asset Manager or a user may modify this attribute All user created at tributes are
108. Is and services in the Java programming language for management and monitoring of applications and networks For more on JMX refer to http www oracle com technetwork java javase tech javamanagement 140525 html 201 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD JMX Monitor This sub task lets you publish Asset Manager data using Java Management Extensions JMX To use this feature you will need a separate license to enable the functionality Once the license key has been installed JMX publishing is done through the configuration of the sub tasks JMX Monitor and JMX Domains When configuring the JMX Monitor you will need to specify the hostname and port of the computer where the JMX software is installed Asset Manager defaults to the local host The local host should be used if the software is installed and running on the same computer as Asset Manager To configure Asset Manager to use JMX perform the following steps 1 Install the JMX License Key using the same steps as outlined in the License Key Configuration sub task The JMX License Key is a separate key that must be installed in addition to the Asset Manager license key Once the key has been properly installed 1t will appear in the license key list 2 After you install the JMX key restart the RF Code Asset Manager service via the Microsoft Windows Service Manager or reboot the Asset Manager application
109. ODE HUMRCK and RFCRCK Tag ID The Tag ID is a unique 8 digit numeric identifier You might have 2 000 THSRCK tags in your environment but you can only have one with the Tag ID of 00001900 Treatment Code The Treatment Code is used together with the Group Code to tell RF Code software how to interpret the data that each tag sends in beacons to RF Code readers A Treatment Code can be associated with multiple Group Codes so it is important to match them exactly when adding them to a specific environment of RF Code readers and tags Note that all tags currently shipped by RF Code as of November 2012 use Treatment Code 04 228 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD All RF Code tags are defined as being members of a specific group and have a unique tag ID number within that group When an RF Code reader is configured it can be supplied with up to eight 8 group code IDs and a corresponding treatment code for each group code The treatment code instructs the reader how to interpret the payload data for each tag event within that group code RF Code tags are smart and have the ability to transmit various types of data within its radio frequency beacon such as indicators for motion panic tamper infrared location and low battery Advanced Reader Configuration The following areas and fields are available to you when configuring RF Code readers Th
110. RE Transmission RF Code Tags RF Code Tags While potentially complex the basic system is easy to use and maintain after the hardware has been deployed and Asset Manager has been initially configured RF Code Readers RFC readers do not use high powered radio or magnetic fields to energize or trigger the RFID tags RFC readers are passive incidental emitters with dual channel radio receivers that are tuned to receive signals at 433 92 MHz A digital signal processor is used to monitor the radio messages received from the tags RF Code Active RFID Tags RFC systems operate at 433 92 MHz the tags are one way transmit only communicators RFC holds numerous FCC grants for transmitters tags RFC s patented communication protocols were designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference Tags typically broadcast their status every 10 seconds but because each message is so short each tag has an actual transmission time of less than 10 seconds per day e Tags operate with a very low duty cycle and long battery life typically 5 years with a 10 second beacon rate e To conserve battery power tags remain in sleep mode 99 99 of the time every 10 seconds the tag will wake up and broadcast an extremely short status message before going back to sleep 11 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD e Each tags RF message includes its uniq
111. RHCOD Asset Manager Administration and Usage Manual 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com PNOO884 REVO7 RFCOD Table of Contents Table soni ads 1 Trademarks 8 Copyn ht Statements iii ii aiii iaa iaa 8 OD VELVIC A o nen oo o o A E o S 9 AM A A PU oo In re ee O NI O A A 9 RF Reonhitory Compliance and RE Transmission AAA AAN 9 Comparison of Active REID Tas and Cell Phone Sigal S sentida dinastia cerati casita 10 RE Code tovare add Hardy are INK IC Wired vts 11 A A NA 11 Prerecuisite TCA AS COn orador espanto ana A ooo e T2 RCode IM IV Rr 13 IFecacio AM lai T 14 Installino ASS DIE IO EL o n pepe TER UIDI MINE EMI M NET 16 BOVE Ie Ne NO OO 16 Dustatlaton TaS OCOS arena i A cr ON RUP Un RUN E a oo Eo E ee DN REOR E EUR UR UNE 16 Getting Started with Asset VIAN Irc RR NO 24 Contorno and Olbettmets adh hao Se eT ee ee ee eT eer eee eT ee TT Te eT ee ee E 24 fever Manager Web Console OVEN ON T 25 PO ERN T T N 26 PO e E AO a T E E a O Soci 28 Tn a oie 29 adds E e a A E dci ii ii dci 29 PR tol Bo tn AA 31 Paaa EE a A E A E E E 34 cr E E A OS 36 A o a rey rg o E E E A 36 Mio Oia 36 o A e nee ere ee o Eo 36 Enviton mental Montos ita Sensor Tauste to eee 39 Manasin
112. S DIES egesta teste E E URN er mre er D Hoc uto rere De SEO re ee Era DIS NU ERO ere an 252 DNA and V9 DD DOPFBAEDID eosdem er te d hien rti MSc E ro D pic Tver DN IU URN Cr DR rer tre 252 Ealo anin ABC Mblbae o os aan a PREPARE trent ere earner E 0 EE e err ere etree E CE ee eee ere Ma ca o al Bic tol IA o eT vert dut ul utur euet reese Toren Proper ent none reer emer on reer mr orn nec i Ar nr IA um cz m j pa e i MAP ESL C r C m J P ds mmr rt 8 c e A PUT TE TV ong en ppp 9229 W aterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin IX 70750 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 WWW code com RFCOD gm my om Y V J Arearer f s ty r C e ATA A C W Q p pm 90 90 Y ae ir F pm Y VV AY A en os mr sus j 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com Pee a a a a a E SC E T cy E E EEE EE EE EEE E A N EE E EET 262 pacBips Upand Restore ser Matapor Daa DS rete ri ei E 262 Pad ap and Restore vis LS S anc vem te oia 262 Dackup and Restore viin Postres conato tree tesi iUe Ra ae Te eee EU DIS et EEEE id 263 pando Ases 264 Mirate the Asset Manager Server Applesana cacon crio c I arit ERRE 264 RF Code Support and Professional Services RF COD Trademarks RF Code and the RF Code logo are trademarks of RF Code Inc Microsoft Windows Windows Server SQL Server and Internet Explorer are trademarks of the Microsoft Corporation in the United States
113. SQL Express 2008 is provided as a part of the Asset Manager installation package and installation wizard however it is intended for use in labs and for limited pilots The Express version of SQL server is limited to 10GB of database size and does not have the capability of performing scheduled backups Also a Microsoft Management Console is not installed as part of the Asset Manager install When deploying in a production environment use Microsoft SQL Server Standard not Express PostgreSQL or DB2 so that you can perform essential database maintenance functions such as backing up restoring re indexing and administering the data generated by Asset Manager To configure either PostgreSQL or SQL Server for production use with Asset Manager a database must be created that is not populated with data and a user that has access to the new database must be created and given full access to the database Do not use the root or sa accounts for security reasons The database can be run on the same system that Asset Manager is installed on or it can be run and accessed by Asset Manager on a remote machine While knowledge of SQL statements and database schema are not required to administer Asset Manager administrators must know how to create secure backup restore and re index the database software they choose to use Beyond the basic tasks related to database configuration there are a few other tasks that require a combination of database con
114. Slave A ePOS En 209 tel Am reee T PP 211 mestatias QUU TNSEDOD tt lali ic Troubles noO UO TT dci dial sane idilio ideados Standard Approach to Troubleshooting elencos Ava oca e A E er tern rT ey eer Edd e a a e E E ee E E E A A A en EE A E EE E O AE 216 f 9 ma 410 eT a M dm Console and User Consale LaNetro pesas Displanino Values 15 the BBelsH Oft Mete y 5EBEIT erpinera EEN EEEE EAEE AR ia Reader Configuration with he Reader Configuration Utensilios quasi UEA REHE NEL ERU ERU SNR Gun Reader Contona on SOR DE Redt VE C OTSO lE oot titus E err mer rere PHENOM eas errr are De DUE err adela RE Gode Tao Group Codes Ws a a reine CodeS tp A O oie Boule Mele carr M ita IB cg elc MI areas Geno rue m Macros tor kepors Que CD DS apa 244 Naicros tor eo 01 ci o MA Cac ere ern E E E DO UL 244 ATTA ad e a MA ee pe cere qub eters eee see ee te ee see ene M aue aM UM E Network Security with RF Code Readers and Asset Manager seins dt darlo dalla Pocke oA ERAS ISE Manet 249 Preliminary Steps for Using SSL Certiticates with RF Code Readers sitosnseosnaesnnemavsiseseastomavaesinetanonanneteuntonsenenadanetnaieaeniunnenns 249 Conticuring SSL tos RE Code Readers usine the Reader Web COnsole sicaunnpusiisnacantin talco ente ted 250 Configuring Asset Manager to Accept SSL ConhoutatioaS miseria areniscas co ips trio plis Ubica 231 EBcr DOO SOUS G
115. Slave Object IDs Modbus Slave Server Modbus Slave Devices e Modbus Slave Addresses 2 Under Modbus Slave Server Configuration set the Port NOTE By default the port is set to 502 However this is a common port used for networking industrial electronic devices Therefore if you complete the configuration of Asset manager for Modbus and there is still no communication between the RF Code and BMS systems e g the Port reports that it is not responding you will want to change this port setting to some port higher than 1024 such as 9502 and test communication between the systems again NOTE Whether you use port 502 or another port you will need to ensure that this port is open in your firewall as this port will need to be queried by the external system consuming the data i e BMS Modbus Servet 208 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Modbus Slave Devices To configure the Modbus Slave Devices perform the following steps 2 Goto Admin Console gt Integration gt Modbus Slave Devices e Asset Manager Administration Modbus Slave Devices BACnet Slave Server BACnet Slave Devices BACnet Slave Object IDs Modbus Slave Server Modbus Slave Devices Modbus Slave Addresses ui 3 Choose the sensors locations details to monitor 4 Select the Attributes that you want to be exposed via Modbus e g tem
116. This check box tells Asset Manager that all values entered in this field must be unique No asset can have the same two values in this field For example if you have an attributed called Social Security Number this would be a unique value for each asset Selecting Values Are Unique will ensure that duplicate values are not entered Restrictable Check this box if you would like this attribute to be one that can be limited to certain groups with the use of the Groups Sub task Hide on User Console Check this box if you would like this attribute to be hidden when viewing assets in the User Console This provides a way to assign attributes and values to assets as an administrative function 67 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD ID The ID field 1s the identifier the system uses to store the asset attribute values By default the ID is auto generated by Asset Manager However you may choose to override the auto generated ID field to simply import and export purposes The ID would equate to the database table column that holds the asset attribute data IDs must be globally unique Type Choose a Type from the drop down menu of the Asset Attribute Types Choose the type that best represents the type of data that users will be entering for the new asset attribute type For most data types an additional area will appear for specifying optio
117. User Audit Trail Region Settings Units Display Browser OS Locale ka Time Zone Browser OS Locale Asset Links Asset Links Manage Asset Manage Assets By Location Manage Assets By Type New IBM Server Asset Link For LDAP externally defined users modifying the respective user under the LDAP Server section 181 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD A Asset Manager Administration LDAP Server Booknaks Mo lo te P cor E Jea e pme User Group Asset Links R ME Michael voth Administrator m a Beau Anderson Administrator Jason Kaye Administrator Greg Eryett Administrator dh Jim Menn Administrator Manage Assets Manage Assets By Location Man Chris Gaskins Administrator Jonathan Luce Administrator db David Gould Administrator db Tim Mitchel Administrator Administrator Asset Editor Administrator Manage Assets Manage Assets By Location Man User Information LDAP Use Waiek e Roles User Groups User Group Membership User Groups For New Assets 8 Same As User Group Membership Select User Groups For New BA asset Manager New 18M Server Asset Link awe e js HO me oe La La La cs La pee 8 tum ives stress Arr EACE Bod 31 J
118. Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 3 Asset Manager Views a eo js PO m i2 ce 9 o Baec nfreomasor A sm g imi lE Nama Server Asset View pr Defaut view Descrpton Qo a Seray View F Asset Tempiates Qa E onmentai vien Ae Types e cp ven dg Serm View d Serves Ascet ver Av a a odas Selected Ft LI Ais z Acrrator Count 21 Name Actwator Court s W Asset Tag Acteotor Input 1 e Peste U Ment AcSvator Input 2 Marsufectunes Acre Alert Count Mode Agent IP Adress e Cperatng Satan Ar flo Position Aber Achnowkedge Hote gt Mert Acknowledged Abert Acknowledced By Alert Message de ms 2 Aber entat Message A B Pom om tA e Acci Coria Ortucs reme Ri Alowec Use Groups Everyone is Reports Graphs Once the Asset Link is configured and saved rights to use this Asset Link can be specified for respective users and or groups of usets in the Admin Console under the User Access section For locally defined users the Asset Link s are defined under the Users section rel Asset Manager Administration Users User Information Enabled Name LDAP User Password Confirm Password Full Name Local Administrator 3 a jluce iO jmenn Email Address es a r4 mwoth I a l Expiration Date dip Asset Links QQ tnitchel Il LDAP Server Li wn Roles System Administrator a A
119. Widget This widget pane displays user configured text on the dashboard The text widget can be configured to be aligned left right or centered This widget pane displays a single attribute value for one asset in a vertical bar format The bar Vertical Bar l widget allows for upper and lower bounds configuration to be set 166 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 TeL 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RI COD Creating a Basic Dashboard To create a basic Dashboard perform the following steps 1 Navigate to the Dashboards Task in the Asset Manager Administrator console 2 Notice that there is a default dashboard configured titled System Status 3 To create a new dashboard click on the New button A settings box will appear prompting a required Name field and sizing specifications Time Fon Sas Vawe Fort Sae Bero a Das voc frere Corsage Pureer Type Face Com UD Com furter Bode wn fedes Cors Sung After you have entered the required information and configured the general Dashboard settings and or optionally configured the Groups function see Security section of this document for more information for this dashboard click the OK button to save You will now see the main dashboard customization panes 167 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD asm Stead GR y Yam Cosa
120. a BACnet network The BACnet Device ID should be in the range of 0 to 4194303 Enter the BACnet Device ID This can be set to any arbitrarily chosen number 5 Click the Save Changes button BACnet Slave Device The BACnet Slave Device is used to configure a set of assets and attributes whose values will be published by the Asset Manager BACnet server BACnet clients can then query the current values of the attributes published for each of the BACnet Slave Devices 205 229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Navigate to Integration gt BACnet Slave Devices click the New button and configure the following fields below Basic Information Name Description BACnet Device Sensor Attributes Attributes Asset Filter For Publishing BACnet Device Sensor Attributes Fiter Asset Type Humidity amp Temperature Fiter Location First Attribute First Attribute Value Operator First Attribute Value Second Attribute Second Attribute Value Operator Second Attribute Value Basic Information e Name Create a name for the Slave Device e Description Create a description for the Slave Device BACnet Slave Device Sensor Attributes e Attributes The Attributes parameter allows the administrator to determine which attributes to publish via BACnet Currently Asset Manager allows numeric Float Integer and Enum and Boolean attribu
121. a RCLADO RI Lv i Temobrature Oe enn E ANN NUM S 39 Creating an Asset Export File to Import Assets in Bulk o s cspetir repite ripe Fix iei etr sates sina uepi rosaninacintuwniimenueuannaceepibosatipiminaimpibesitonanins 40 Contouring an Asset Export Fileto Populate and tien PO risa vua caper dex PL rd cota vd be MORENO 41 eno er ge Lo o E EE tes 43 BC ic Miu 44 occ M igo T E E Rm 44 Xeuins AA inui tin ud creer Teen errant d m creer eer bau 46 2 i Ar nr IA um cz m j pa e i MAP ESL C r C m J P ds mmr rt 8 c e A vesc ec saxi adi em mda ufa cmm 9229 W aterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin IX 70750 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 WWW code com RFCOD totali ao al o NE NON O O A mere aren yrs rere 47 Ngewaneangxsser d pesao N00 errata pese DO 49 Deus Ass IPS rr 50 DSS ad tool oy io PRIORI e o ee o o Sei o E E beset cenees 50 Creatas Asset E contado 50 Creddne F Oldces tor Aster Lempa Suu artiaeaveltie aiii unidas tios 02 Locanonsand the Location D 2 0 6 01 RS POPE O PERE E RRE CEO O es ErEE EDU Reb karkani 54 a o AAA A D TO TER 55 Conran toc Bes DOC ADDS hdi oe sas E A A T 56 Locations and Ul PR 56 ua MAC S ENDE o E 59 OOVeruie round ASSI uncut o 59 POET ta STATA SOS ss cesses cepa aca 59 ee e O EN Hu nM 60 a 60 S mate 60 Usine GC a
122. a center In the Administrator Console Locations are modeled as a location hierarchy or location tree E e Location e Unknown Location E es Texas E e Austin B RFC HQ Datacenter B RFC HO Row 1 iy RFC HO Row 1 Rack 1 iy RFC HO Row 1 Rack 2 B RFC HQ Row 2 liy RFC HQ Row 2 Rack 1 RFC HQ Row 2 Rack 2 lj RFC HQ CRAC 1 iy RFC HQ CRAC 2 Above is an example of Locations defined in the location tree that represent a data center with six rows A F and 10 racks in each row Notice that the Locations get more specific deeper into the location tree e g Austin Data Center gt Row A gt Rack 1 A Summary Asset an Asset that represents a Location is a unique object that must be explicitly created by the system Administrator Not all Locations need to be represented by a Summary Asset It depends upon the Location and the needs of the end users which is why it is left up to the Administrator to decide and create When you create a Summary Asset you are associating tying it to a specific Location Any location can have a corresponding Summary Asset associated to it Some locations have an obvious need to be treated as both an Asset and a Location A good example of this duality is a Location that represents an IT Rack in a data center Each rack is clearly a Location that holds other Assets e g servers appliances storage systems However each IT Rack is also an Asset unto itself that needs to be tracked and managed Anot
123. a copy of a graph so that other users can quickly build a new graph based on an existing graph To do this click the Copy button Running Graphs Graphs are shown in a table of available graph outputs Graphs are categorized in the graph table by Name Job Start Time Job Stop Time and Graph Status The Name column is self explanatory The Start Time and Stop Time values for a Graph define the temporal boundaries for the data displayed in the Graph e g reader noise readings for a time range of a week starting at midnight 12AM on a Monday morning and ending at 11 59PM on the following Sunday The Graph Status column lets you know if the Graph job has finished and if not why not Graph Status values ate 153 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD e Complete This indicates that the Graph job is complete and ready to be viewed or exported e Queued This indicates that the Graph job is in the queue waiting to be run e Running This indicates that the Graph job is currently running e Failure This indicates that the Graph job failed due to an internal error To view a graph select the appropriate graph from the list and then click the View button A window will appear displaying the graph in PNG format such as the one below Total Rack Cooling Index RCI HI 8 8 o 00 00 02 00 04 00 Austin Data Center Total Rack Cooling In
124. a library you may manually import Root CA certificate for that authority to keystore of Asset Manager 251 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD jre bin keytool importcert file lt Root CA certificate file gt keystore conf keystore NOTE The command to import a Root CA will always prompt for the password to Asset Manager s keystore The default password for Asset Manager s keystore is rfcode Re importing a Root CA certificate is NOT required if Asset Manager is upgraded to the next version Encryption with Key Pairs Asset Manager and all RF Code readers support SSL based on x 509 certificates These can be generated using key pairs in a wide variety of formats Some of the encryption keys generated in the process of building these certificates can be generated using passcodes passkeys However this portion of the key generation process is irrelevant to the process of verifying the validity of the key pairs during SSL processing SNMP V1 and V3 Trap Formatting In order to integrate with NMS systems you must use the following trap format and trap functions Traps coming from Asset Manager have a base OID of 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 The following trap specific content 1s available 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 1 0 The name of the alert which caused the trap Octet String 1 3 6 1 4 1 32410 100 2 0 The GUID of the alert which caused the trap Octet String
125. ader Configuration Utility you will need to enter and confirm the password for use with Asset Manager Sensor Manager e Confirm Password Enter the same password again NOTE The following sections are generally not used and should be done with caution and planning Position Settings e Position Source o If your reader is not going to use a GPS location then leave the default setting of None o Ifyou are going to connect the reader to a GPS device select Reader GPS to enable it to report its GPS coordinates and to filter GPS data Doing so will present you with additional fields related to configuring GPS settings Minimum Tag SSI for Position Match Input the minimum SSI value required that will indicate that the tagged asset will match the position of the reader to indicate the GPS location GPS Data Reporting For this field choose which GPS data you want reported in the Asset Manager Sensor Manager system Minimum GPS Update Period Select this checkbox to use global settings or enter a value Minimum Horizontal Change Select this checkbox to use global settings or enter a value Minimum Vertical Change Select this checkbox to use global settings or enter a value o Ifyou would like to set a static GPS location for the reader select Static Position enter the Minimum Tag SSI for Position Match described above and then manually enter its GPS coordinates in Reader Position field that becomes visible 230
126. administration needed within Asset Manager This lightens the load for the Asset Manager system Administrator especially for installations with a very large User population LDAP Server Configuration The LDAP Server sub task is used to configure access to an LDAP server for User and Group account management To configure LDAP for use with Asset Manager perform the following steps 193 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 1 Inthe Admin Console go to Security gt LDAP Server gt Server Configuration Asset Manager Administration LDAP Server Je Jo t Permissio Server Configurati Basic Information Name Enabled Network Settings Hostname LDAP Server rfoode com Port 389 Use SSL F Authentication Settings 2 Configure the LDAP server settings Basic Information Mame Enabled Network Settings Hostname Port Use SSL Basic Information Name This can be any name you choose to call your LDAP server Enabled This must be checked in order for Asset Manager to access your LDAP server Network Settings Hostname Enter the hostname name of your LDAP server Port Enter the port number over which you will connect to your LDAP server In most cases this is port 389 which is the default for Active Directory NOTE If you enable use of SSL your port n
127. al data on a scheduled basis utilizing a selectable data range The statistical computations supported are Maximum Minimum Median Average and Standard Deviation The outputs from the Statistical Computation Engine are stored as Asset Attributes that can then be utilized throughout Asset Manager in live grid views dashboards graphs reports and so forth Once the Statistical Computation Engine is enabled two additional menu entries will be available for use in the Administrator console under the Data Schema task Statistical Pack and Statistical Policy Note Before configuring these items you will need to create new target attributes to hold the statistical data The new attributes can be created under Asset Attributes or Status Attributes using the New Statistic button The target Attributes are created as child attributes of the source attribute As an example go to Administrator console Data Schema gt Status Attributes Select an attribute such as Temperature Click on the New Statistic button Enter a Name in this case Daily Maximum Temperature Choose Maximum from the Statistic dropdown menu Click the Save Changes button Bookm Dashboard Mo Filter Lx Name and Type S Configuration Integration e Locations Rules Maps A Data Schema T Asset Attributes Status Attributes G Calculated Asset Attributes di Asset Types Custom Attribute Types Z Statistical Pack Statistical Po
128. alled One Year Warranty Expiration Date 3 Selecta category Calculation and a field order and then click the OK button The Attribute will now appear in the Attributes box 4 Click Save Changes Now that the Calculated Asset Attribute has been created and applied to an Asset Type all assets that are assigned the Asset Type in this example Asset Tag will now have a Calculated Asset Attribute that can be used with various other tasks and sub tasks Reports Alerts etc within Asset Manager 33 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 34 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Conditional Formatting with Attributes Formatting for Asset Attributes Status Attributes and Calculated Attributes can also be configured to conditionally change the foreground and background color of a cell in Asset View panels and in Asset grids in the Administrator or User Dashboards depending on the attribute value For example a numerical attribute can be configured so that the cell background turns red when its value exceeds 100 a ort ja aer y mt fart ers freee uri ted A Ca dr Ra ToU mea tab amet rw ue ere gt Multiple rules can be applied to formatting and the value of an attribute is evaluated against rules from the top down The first rule matched determin
129. an additional area appears in the editor with a drop down list of Asset Types This type is used to refer or link to an asset that has already been entered in to the Asset Manager database An example would be an asset attribute called Connected Display which points to an Asset Type called LCD Display When a new asset type is added to the system and that asset type is defined with the attribute Connected Display then the user will be prompted to select from a sub list of assets e g LCD Display In this way if a desktop PC is added to the system the LCD display list which is also in the system can then be linked refer to it These ate just a few of the variable Asset Attribute Type configuration options For more detailed assistance with configuring Asset Types and Custom Asset Types please contact RF Code support Editing Asset Attributes To edit an Asset Attribute perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Admin Console gt Data Schema gt Asset Attributes and the asset attributes task pane will appear on the right The asset attributes task pane is divided into two sections which are the list of defined asset attributes on the left and the asset attribute editor on the right 2 Select the appropriate asset attribute from the list of asset attributes Once asset attribute is selected the editor will appear on the right of the task pane displaying the details 3 Edit the appropriate details of the as
130. and thus an association between some Assets and Status Attributes cannot be broken Status Attributes are immutable in order to preserve the primary details of any Static Attribute e g Attribute Type ID etc This facilitates direct access to the Asset Manager database via SQL query and other reporting tools However you can make one of three possible changes that can affect the appearance of the Attribute and whether values for it can be entered by end users To view the details of a Status Attribute perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Data Schema gt Status Attribute The Status Attributes task pane will appear on the right 2 From the list of Status Attributes click on any one to see its properties The details of the Status Attribute will appear in the far right window pane 3 If necessary check or uncheck the following checkboxes Name and Type Record Value Changes Restrictable ls Record Value Changes Restrictable 4 Apply formatting changes to the Attribute that are triggered by specific values or ranges Formatting Foreground Color Background Color Operator 5 Click the Save Changes button 78 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Calculated Asset Attributes Calculated Asset Attributes are attributes that are derived from computations requiring data from other attributes Three com
131. archy Manage Assets By Type Pre defined filter s to view assets by their respective type e g Server temp sensor or IT Rack summary assets Asset Builder Jobs Rarely used Contact RF Code Support Access Control Rarely used Contact RF Code Support Maps Accessing and navigating maps created in the Admin Console Map Views Map Configuration section Manage Reports Create modify schedule and run detailed Reports in this section reports are related to asset activity View previously run Reports and export their output here Manage Graphs Create modify schedule and run detailed Graphs in this section reports are related to asset activity Actions Manage and create the potential actions for Reports amp Graphs i e email actions to send graphs BIRT Templates Configure advanced reports Me AE Actions Create and modify the output mechanisms for sending data from events outside of Asset Manager e g email snmp traps Triggers Roughly equivalent to a threshold triggers allow for filters and parameters to be set on system metrics to enable events to be sent Alert Management Alert Viewer View active and historical asset alerts generated by threshold breeches Actions Create and modify the output mechanisms for sending data from alarms alerts outside of Asset Manager e g email snmp traps Thresholds Parameters and filters for defining when a system level alert should be triggered Displaying Values in the En
132. are Actions available for Alerts but not for Events 109 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com gt f T REF COD e Serial Device List Choose a serial device to send an alert to e Serial Message on Open Input a message to send when an alert is opened e Serial Message on Resolve Input a message to send when alert is resolved Copying Alert Actions To copy an action perform the following steps 1 Click the Copy button By default the name of the Action is Copy of lt name of the action copied gt 2 Enter or modify the Name and any other settings 3 Click the Save Changes button Testing Alert Actions To test an action chose an Action from the list of available Actions and then click the Test button NOTE For trap actions vs Actions that delivery information the Test button only tests that the Asset Manager system sent the trap You will need to go to the target host in order to verify that the trap was successfully sent and received Deleting Alert Actions To delete an action chose an Action from the list of available Actions and then click the Delete button Alert Thresholds This sub task allows you to set specific conditions thresholds upon which alerts are created Alert Thresholds are configured in both the Admin Console and in the User Console The options available are different in each Console System Alert
133. at e Alert Action Repeat Interval Specify the number of seconds of the interval you would like for the alert action to repeat at e Alert When Resolved Select this checkbox to enable a message to trigger a notice when the alert has been resolved Configuration Settings for Different Kinds of Alert Actions Configuring Email Alert Actions e Email Address es Specify a valid Email address e Alert Action Message Define the message to be delivered in the alert NOTE Macros can be used when configuring Alert Actions For more information about Macros refer to the Using Macros 107 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD section in the Appendix NOTE For FTP HTTP and Logging actions the information that will be transmitted will be a combination of the following o The replaced values for all macros available to the action see table above with the exception of the following macros which only output a partial date or time DATE YEAR MONTH DAY TIME HOUR MINUTE SECOND MILLISECOND TIMEZONE_OFFSET o Additional source attributes specified in the definition of the source alert o Other values for backwards compatibility of alert actions All alert action name value pairs from previous versions of HTTP and FIP alert actions are included and supported Since some names do not match the macro name for the same value the value is duplicated Con
134. at the reader is reset to observe tag IDs of the next partition index The default is O which will not reset the reader to observe tag IDs of the next partition index For additional in depth information about Reader Partitioning consult the following RF Code Support KB article http support rfcode com customer portal articles 846 730 Diagnostics 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD e Noise Threshold This is the threshold for Asset Manager Sensor Manager to send an alert for excessive RF noise in the system as detected by the reader D command for noise level If the noise is excessive the reader performance is compromised e Tag Event Rate Threshold This is the threshold that will determine high reader event activity Serial Port e Serial Driver Choose the serial driver parameters used to communicate with the serial device This should be indicated with the literature that came with the device For additional information consult the following KB article http support rfcode com customer portal articles 728501 ici LT E d ee Pags adi WEE T e PE TAS NJ Gri i 33 A O22 VV aterford v enue Blvd IUILS UU Austin A 10 50 bd Tel 512 A 4 2 iO 2200 Fa X 5h12 A 29 2100 WWW rtc O dec om RF COD Default Asset Schemas Asset Manager is packaged with two default Asset Schemas that you can import and use immediately to
135. at you would like to filter by e First Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected The following are possible Operator choices NOTE Depending on the Attribute you select for the Trigger the list of Operator choices may vaty Attribute Value Operator Does Not Contain Starts With Has Value Does Mot Have Value e First Attribute Value Enter the value that will be compared to if applicable based on the operator selected e Second Attribute Select a second attribute you would like to filter by e Second Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected e Second Attribute Value Enter the value that will be compared to if applicable based on the operator selected e Third Attribute Select a third attribute you would like to filter by e Third Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected 103 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD e Third Attribute Value Enter the value that will be compared to if applicable based on the operator selected e Trigger When Entering Filter Select this checkbox if you would like the trigger to initiate the configured actions when the attribute enters the state specified by the trigger configuration e Trigger On Attribute Update Select this checkbox if you would like the t
136. aterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD User Accounts and Security within Asset Manager Security in Asset Manager is achieved through the addition and configuration of Roles Groups Permissions and some Advanced Asset Security options for User accounts User Accounts Roles and Permissions Asset Manager enables the designation of six User Roles Asset Editor Asset Manager Asset Reporter Asset Reporter with Events amp Alerts Asset Viewer and System Administrator The six Roles have different levels of access to different features and functions within Asset Manager The base parameter of security configuration is the assignment of a Role to a User This can be done when a User account is created or at any point in the future by editing a User account The following are brief descriptions of the six User Roles and the level of access for each presented in order of least access to most access within Asset Manager Asset Viewer Asset Viewers have the ability to view information about Assets to run Reports to export data and to execute searches for Assets and other information about conditions in the environment Asset Reporter Asset Reporters have all of the abilities of Asset Viewers and also have the ability to create edit and delete Reports and Graphs Asset Reporter Alerts amp Events Asset Reporters with Alerts amp Events permissions have al
137. attribute value for one asset in a LCD style text display This widget pane displays a single attribute value for one asset as an LCD style text display along LCD Display with with an LED light indicator in an On or Off state The state of the LED to On or Off is LED configured to be determined by a logical operation on the attribute value being dis played Example When Temperature is greater than 100 show a lighted LED state This widget pane displays a single attribute value for one asset in an LED dial format The dial allows for upper and lower boundary settings The center of the dial has an LCD text style display showing the current value of the attribute being displayed LED Dial This widget pane displays a table of all the alerts currently in the open state The table lists the Alert Start Time Severity and the Alert Message description The widget displays multiple pages in a cases where multiple alerts listed are greater than a single page Double clicking on any one of the listed alerts will open an Alert Information dialog displaying the extended alert information 165 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com w RFCOD This widget pane displays an LED in an On or Off state The LED state is determined by a logical Single LED operation on one attribute of a single asset Example When a Door state is equal to Open show a lighted LED state Text
138. ax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD When you click on the drop down menu for the foreground and background colors you will get a dialog box with a color palette for you to choose like in the below screenshot Asset Manager Administration Status Attributes CE j 3 On fee Mm Necro ose ype y Daahtnerd Umirguratam pra zo IMPIDE f 5 Locations tuits Pape Data china 77 enact Afetedes iisi Atr s 4 oe mee Bom het geeets regen me bh Mert Fhanaga met Dest Weert aiie For the example Temperature attribute we chose o A Red Foreground Color when Temperature is Greater Than Or Equal To 90 degrees F o A Blue Foreground Color when Temperature is Less Than Or Equal To 70 degrees F 88 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD That example configuration for the Temperature Attribute would look like this in the Formatting section of the Status Attributes configuration options as seen in the screenshot below Asset Manager Administration Status Attributes 89 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RE COD System Notifications Overview of System Notifications System notifications take the form of Events and Alerts Both can be accessed and configured in the Admin Console and in the User
139. be set to sbin nologin for security purposes Root or sudo access is only needed in order to install or upgrade the RPM as is typical of RPM based installs this level of access is not necessary for day to day operation No Asset Manager process will ever run as root Installing in a different directory If usr share rfcode is not an acceptable location then create a symbolic link for usr share rfcode that links to the directory location that you prefer For example to install the software in opt rfcode first create the opt rfcode directory and type the following s opt rfcode usr share rfcode When the rpm is installed the files will physically reside at the alternate location you prefer It is possible to move the files and modify the startup script manually but you will encounter issues when you upgrade Asset Manager because the installation is scripted to use the ust shate rfcode directory Executing under a Different Account Neither the rfcode user nor the group that the Zone Manager rpm installs has a password or an interactive shell The account is exclusively used to execute the application at a lower level of permission than the superuser account If the execution account needs to be changed this can be done by editing the startup script and modifying the execution user to be the preferred account However if you do this you will also have to change the file system permissions to be owned by the approptiate user and gro
140. button ee CA m a om E Configure bookmarks Delete Next to the column header for Name is the Bookmark configuration drop down menu e To sort your Bookmarks alphabetically from A to Z click Sort Ascending e To sort your Bookmarks from Z to A click Sort Descending e To remove a Bookmark highlight it and then click the Delete button Folders Another useful tool available from most of the Task configuration areas including the Dashboard task configuration area is the Folder The New Folder button is found the horizontal row of buttons to the right of the Bookmark Menu 2 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Asset Manager Administration Dashboard Eo Dashboard Te Online ke Configuration Filter H Aiaia 2 Logged m Component Configured Ee admin 127 0 0 1 admin Database Connection of E System Status admin 127 0 0 1 admin Zone Manager s Y Reader s P Using Folders in Asset Manager is the same as it is in most graphical operating systems and provides a way to categorize and organize your files which in the case of Asset Manager can be Reports Graphs Events Alerts Asset Templates etc As a simple reference an example of how to create and use a folder can be found in the Asset Template section of this document Other examples of creating folders can be found in various other sections of this
141. can be alerted or determine the next course of action to take for managing your asset If Asset Manager cannot determine the current Location of an Asset the Location field will display Unknown or it will display the last known Location depending on how Asset Manager has been configured Determining where an asset actually is located is a function of server configuration readers tags locators and or rules Server configuration for Locations is covered in the Configuration for Unknown Locations section Configuration for readers tags locators and or rules is covered in those respective sections 55 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RI COD Configuration for Unknown Locations The administrator has the ability to control the behavior of how the Location field displays its value This behavior is controlled in the Admin Console from the Configuration task under Server 1 Asset Manager Administration Server Bookmarks Region Settings er Select units of measure used by the Dashboard server when running non interactive Server Operating System Local v actions alerts scheduled reports Configuration Server Time Zone America Chicago Database T License Keys Asset Security 4 SMTP Server Enable Advanced Asset Security E 5 Import Configuration bes m Update Assets to Unknown Location No matching location rules amp Tag Gr
142. cation for the installation folders and files or choose an alternate path that you would prefer NOTE If you choose an installation path other than the default be sure to note this information and keep it accessible should you ever need to contact RF Code Support 5 Click Next and in the Select Components window use the drop down menu and choose the installation option you prefer NOTE Most often you will want to choose the first option in the drop down menu that installs both Asset Manager and Zone Manager as opposed to installing only the Zone Manager component the latter is only done if you already have an existing installation of Asset Manager on another server 6 On the next window click Install 7 Click OK to install the default database Microsoft SQL Server Express Edition which is bundled with the Asset Manager installation package NOTE Choose this option only if you are installing AM as a pilot installation SQL Server Express is not supported as a full production database for reasons such as scalability configuration options and performance If you do choose to install the bundled version of SQL Server Express to use as a database initially be prepared to use it only as a temporary store of data and as a proof of concept You will want to start from scratch when you install Asset Manager with a fully functional database when you deploy to a production environment NOTE During the installation of SQL Server Express do not chang
143. cations required to run Asset Manager depending on the number of tags you will deploy in your production environment Number of Tags in CPU Cores in the RAM installed in the Deployment Environment Application Server Application Server es lt 1 000 lt 10 000 3GB lt 20 000 4GB 5GB NOTE The storage space required to host your data can be calculated with the assistance of the RF Code Storage Capacity Calculator For more information refer to the RF Code Storage Space Calculator available online http support rfcode com customer portal articles 760679 Web Browsers Supported Client Support e Microsoft Internet Explorer 10 amp 11 IE 10 amp IE 11 e Mozilla Firefox 36 e Google Chrome 41 e Apple Safari 8 Installation Instructions Windows Installation Instructions To install Asset Manager in Windows perform the following steps 1 Run the installer s executable file from the RF Code Asset Manager CD or from the Asset Manager file that you downloaded 16 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin IX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD NOTE RF Code Support can provide entitled customers with download links to the Asset Manager installer and upgrade executable files 2 When the Asset Manager Setup Wizard starts click Next to continue 3 Read the License Agreement dot the radio button next to I accept the agreement and then click Next 4 Accept the default lo
144. ce the correct information is completed in the report editor click the Save Changes button at the bottom of the editor screen to save the report At this point the report is defined created and ready to run NOTE A copy of a report can be made so that a user can quickly build a new report based on an existing report To do this click the Copy button Running and Viewing Reports To run a report from the Manage Reports configuration task perform the following steps 1 Select the appropriate report from the list of reports and then click on the Run Report or the Run and View Report button A window will appear prompting you to name the report Pura trite A Weport Nara Austin Qeaders 3011 15 57 110 By default a name is provided which is the name of the report in addition to the day date and time of the run Use the generated name or edit the name and then click OK to run the report All outputs of reports that are run are available on the Reports sub task NOTE If the Run and View Report button is selected then you will be prompted for the report name just as before but after the report finishes running the report output will be shown without the need to go to the Reports sub task to view it NOTE You can also view reports from the Reports configuration task either by clicking the View button or by double clicking the name of any listed report A Report Output pop up window will open To export the Report highlight it a
145. click the right arrow or double click it to move it from the Available to the Selected window Report Graph Actions Available Selected Email Report Graph to Dan 4 OK hn x Cancel Click the OK button The Actions section is now configured and will appear in the Report Graph Actions atea 150 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Graph Filters Post Conditions Columns and Appearance The last four 4 configuration areas for Graphs are Filter Post Condition Columns and Appearance Filter Filter Type Reader First Attribute First Attribute Value Second Attribute Second Attribute Value Post Condition Attribute Attribute Value Graph Filter and Post Condition Filter and Post Condition sections define the criteria that must be met in order for a data point to be included in a graph If left blank all data points related to the type and time specified in the graph configuration will be included Both the filter and the post condition are configured by selecting an attribute an operator and a value as follows Attribute Online Status Condition Has Value Value Vv If this example is used in the filter section of the graph definition then points on the graph will only be produced for Zone Manager attribute changes that happen while the online status has a value If this example was us
146. clicked the scheduler window will appear allowing you to select the appropriate schedule for the report Dally Weekly CO ml y Dally Options ANC Vineness 06 15 am NOTE If you want to turn off the scheduled report while preserving the schedule settings the Enable Schedule checkbox must not be checked however this checkbox must be checked in order for the schedule to take effect Report Actions The Report Action section lets you choose an Action if one has been configured using the Actions sub task and a format for the report NOTE For more information on configuring Actions for Reports refer to the Using Actions with Reports and Graphs section To use a configured report action perform the following steps 1 Choose an Action Format from the drop down list CSV JSON PDF SQLITE or XML Actions Action Format Report Graph Actions JSON PDF SQLITE XML 140 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RI COD 2 Click the ellipsis button beneath the Action Format drop down button The Report Graph Actions window will appear Available Filter x Email Report Graph to Dan s 3 Choose one or more Report Graph Actions and click the right arrow or double click Report Graph Actions to move it from the Available to the Selected window pane Email Report Graph to Dan 4 Click the OK button The
147. come up first 5 Enter the credentials into the various fields but DO NOT click OK Use the Test function to verify that the database connection will work When it returns with a successful connect proceed to the next step If there are problems connecting troubleshooting should begin at this time 6 On the old system still running Asset Manager stop the service and disable it in the services menu You may also want to uninstall the software as well so that there is no possibility of the system ever connecting to the database again It is CRITICAL that the database must not be used by two instances of Asset Manager at the same time Doing to will cause irreparable corruption to the data and configuration settings 264 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD 7 Backup the Database 8 On the new system if you are not copying over the system properties file click OK on the database dialog If you are using the previous system properties file then stop the Asset Manager Server and place the file in c program Files RF Code Asset Manager conf or whatever similar path your installation might be and start the service again In either case after 3 5 minutes log into the software 9 Check the Zone Manager status in the Administration Menu Due to a credential mismatch the Zone Man ager may be shown in an offline condition with the error Access Denied
148. configuration screen is organized into four sections The first section Basic Information is simply where the Name of the Asset Link is defined and where the filters configured in the Asset Link can be locked so that users who are able to view the respective Asset Link can not dynamically modify the filters for the link 179 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Basic Information Name New IBM Server Asset Link Lock Link E The second section Navigation Tree is used to define very high level filter information for the Asset Link being created The Navigate By option is used to define the class of object that the filter will be based on In the example below IBM Servers will be our target filter so our Navigate By option is most appropriately based on an Asset Type filter The Navigation Root defines where in the respective hierarchy our filter search will begin In this example Computer is the most appropriate designation Navigation Tree Navigate By Asset Type Kol Navigation Root Computer ES m The Asset Link Filter section is where the specific filtering parameters for the Asset Link are defined and specified Specifically Link Type defines the type of Asset being filtered on In this case similar to the Navigation Root we will choose Computer since an IBM Server
149. creating the formula that it represents from the configuration settings Calculated Asset Attributes Configuration Settings The following settings are available when configuring Calculated Asset Attributes e Name The name of the Calculated Asset Attribute e Description The description of the attribute e Record Value Changes Check this box if you want value of the Calculated Asset Attribute to be recorded to the database each time the value changes If this box is left unchecked the first value for the Calculated Asset Attribute will be recorded but if this value changes this will NOT be recorded to the database e Restrictable Check this box if you would like this attribute to be one that can be limited to certain groups with the use of the Groups Sub task e ID This field is automatically generated when you enter a Name e Type Select a type of the attribute from the drop down list The Attribute Expression must resolve to a value compatible with the type selected in this list e Attribute Expression Enter a calculated attribute expression in this box either through typing in the formula using the proper operators or use the expression buttons beneath the box Attribute Function Asset Attribute and Time to building the attribute expression from pre defined choices 80 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD e Att
150. ct your Network or System Administrator for obtaining a signed SSL Certificate First you will need to generate a private key or use a certificate authority to create one Either way you will then need a private key to generate a CSR and then submit the CSR to a certificate authority 1 Obtain a private key using a preferred tool or use a certificate authority to provide this service NOTE You will want to archive the key and file in a safe place for security purposes This key will be needed later when you configure the SSL certificate A Certificate Signing Request CSR is then generated based on the private key 2 Submit the CSR to a certificate authority The certificate authority then issues an SSL certificate in a PEM format based on the CSR 249 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com v RF COD Configuring SSL for RF Code Readers using the Reader Web Console After you get a signed SSL certificate from a certificate authority then import it to the reader To configure the reader with an SSL Certificate perform the following steps 1 Inthe reader web console browse to Configuration gt Network gt General om Reader Network Configuration Sg Configuration Fiber General e Network Configuraton xm Wired nierface ethD Reader ConSopsraton Jsers Up Connect C Time HTTP Tag Fiter HTTPS amp Serisi Ports Command Serve
151. cycle Profile e Building Environmentals e Computing Facility Environmentals e CRAC Airflow Profile e CRAC Environmentals e Door Sensor Profile e Location e Power Outlet Monitoring Profiles e Rack Asset Information e Rack Capacity Profiles e Rack Environmental Sensors e Rack Power Profiles e Row Capacity Profile e Row Environmental Tracking e Row Power Tracking e Temp Airflow Profile e Temperature Sensor Profile 4 y MN 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 c AAT 59D PA Es y m gt ADM 210 Cf 9 WAYAY Z 5 Y C Cx UJ c X lt 12 AS A c UY Y WV V VW 242 rfcode com RF COD User Role Matrix The following table provides a matrix of functions within the User Console that are enabled or disabled for each of the User Roles to which you can assign a user of Asset Manager Task Dashboards Dashboards Dashboards Dashboards Dashboards Tag Management Manage Tags Tag Management Tag Summary Customization Asset Templates View Create Edit Copy Delete Customization Views Assets Access Manage Assets View Assets Access Manage Assets by Assets Access Manage Assets by Assets Add Edit Assets Assets View Asset Details Assets Retire Unretired Assets Assets Delete Assets Assets Export Asset Data Assets Pause Updates Assets Change Views Assets Import Asset Data Assets Asset Builder Jobs Maps View Map D
152. d _ mapvaluetype entries which contain the data type of the hash table key and value Currently map values may only be defined by the Asset Manager and not a user password Holds a password value The encoding used is specified by the attribute class encoding property a single date time accurate to seconds tyepref A reference to an entity type object typeref list A list of references to entity type objects Entity Type Entity Types are objects representing the different types of Entity objects defined within the Asset Manager Entity Types define the population of attributes that may be present on Entity objects Each Entity Type must have a unique object ID Entity Types can be arranged in a hierarchy by allowing one Entity Type to be specified as the parent of other Entity Types Entity Type attributes also inherit from parent to child so setting the city attribute of a parent Entity Type will cause that attribute to be shown on all of its children and any descendants unless those Entity Types provide their own value for the city attribute A child Entity Type may override any of its parent Entity Type At tribute objects A child may not however remove an Entity Type Attribute if its parent defines In most cases an Entity Type defines the attributes which make up an Entity unless the Attribute Class object has set the Inherit Attributes value to false Setting Inherit Attributes can b
153. d Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 3 Inthe right pane click the drop down menu for Asset Alert Threshold B asset Manager Thresholds Saar SOn Tis Tes To ocn Te eo Fher i ig E B Anat fut i Expected Location T B Asaet DWee Aliri rana eT Gaver Door Open a ms Teu I tbe hase Aint Mrest docu Tes Terp Thrvs odc Zuated a m ytery Alert Theeahadt Dani oo lert Tires ok Disabile B Tanor Alert Threshott B test Door Open amp otr Door Open LN ath termpermure tes wadis 4 From the drop down menu choose Custom Alert Threshold Search po FP A E O A A O DA A O tre si i amp Asset Mot in Expected Loci n Thies set Orne Aer Threshow TEST B Gaver Door Opes b ima Teat Onine Asme Aiert Thresh were Tha Dro Thesis Diab Luw Battery Gert Trteestioxt Dsatae Thresa hntt Cinatind t Um menear wal Unatesa 129 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 5 Using the form pictured below complete the fields to configure the Asset Alert Threshold Fito vel Asset Alert Threshold a Asset Not In Expected Location Thres b Asset Offline Alert Threshoid TEST Gauer Door Open Name LA Jim s Test Online Asset Alert Thresh pe Active a Jim s Test Temp Thre
154. d User resides in the Users directory Any user who has privilege to query the directory can be the Bind User Users to be added must reside under the top level which is known as the Search Base The users could reside in sub folders beneath the Search Base but they must be somewhere within this hierarchy and not under a separate or parallel hierarchy The Search Filter is typically pre populated by the system and shouldn t be modified Depending on the size of your LDAP tree you may need one or more of the following monikers when specifying the path in the tree e cn common name e ou otganizational unit e dc domain component Example Simple Path cn Dan Horowitz cn users de rfcode de com NOTE The path must be specified in reverse order of the tree NOTE The default naming convention for Active Directory is Lastname Firstname If you use the default naming convention then you will have to use an escape character Bind Password The LDAP password of the bind user Confirm Password Type the bind user password again Query Information for LDAP Users User Search Base cn Users dc rfcode dc com User Filter objectClass 2person Search Filter sAMAccountName 0 User DN Attribute distinguishedName Account Expiration Attribute accountExpires Email Attribute mail User Search Base Field In this field you will need to enter the path to the directory in the tree that contains the users that match the names of
155. d a Rule to a Location perform the following steps 56 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 1 Select a location from the Location Hierarchy 2 Click the New Rule button 3 From the drop down list select the type of rule you would like to add NOTE When the Match by IR Locator Rule is selected a field titled Zone Manager will appear in the Rule Configuration box The administrator is now able to specify which particular Zone Manager the rule applies to This allows the administrator to duplicate IR Locator Numbers for different Zone Managers and causes the selected rule to be only applied when the specific IR Location Number is seen on the specified Zone Manager The administrator will be able to choose from any of the Zone Managers that have been configured NOTE IR based rules trump everything 1 e they prevent rules based on signal strength indicators SSI from pulling assets out of an IR defined Location 4 Fill im the required fields and click Save Changes The rule should now appear in the Locations amp Rules tree under the location you have just applied the rule to Channels of a reader will show up in the left panel only when a readet s Zone Manager configured in Reader Configuration is online Rule Types and Configuration Options The following table contains the names and descriptions of the Rule available for assignment to diff
156. der click the Edit Folder button 136 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD NOTE To delete a folder click the Delete Folder button and the folder will be removed from the data tree 4 Click the New button to create a report 5 Selecta report template from the System Report drop down menu in the Admin Console system Report Consolidated System Report Reader Custom Report Reader Noise Report Reader Online Report User Access Report Zone Manager Custom Report Zone Manager Offline Report Zone Manager Online Report Or select an Asset Report from the Asset Report menu in the User Console Asset Report Asset Alert Report Assets In Motion Report Assets With Low Battery Level Report Assets With Panic Report Assets With Tamper Report Consolidated Asset Report Custorn Report Door Close Report Door Open Report Expected Location Report Humidity Report Location Change Report Offline Asset Report Online Asset Report summary Report Assets By Location Summary Report Assets By Unexpected Location Temperature Report Unassigned Tag Report Unexpected Location Report Untagged Asset Report 13 7 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD After choosing a report template the report editor screen will then appear to let you configure the ne
157. dex RCI HI I o x gt o o 840 o o o E t m La 8 o h Filtering Graphs Above the list of Graphs available in the Graphs task just beneath the View and Delete buttons there are filters you can use to search for graphs Ja Time Today Range 3 E cr 2018 0408 15 00 37 2013 04 05 16 00 37 COMPLETE Job Start Time Job Stop Time Graph Status The Graph Search Filters let you search by Type as defined and named in Manage Graphs by the Time the Graph was created and by the Date or Date Range of the information presented in the Graph To run a graph perform the following steps 1 Select the appropriate graph from the list of graphs and then click on the Run Graph or the Run and View Graph button A window will appear prompting you to name the output of the graph Graph Name Miesse Enter A Gaph Name Austin Readers Mane 1011 10 07 14 1548 ok I Cansel 2 By default a name is provided which is the name of the graph in addition to the day date and time of the run Use the supplied name or edit the name and then click OK to run the graph All outputs of graphs that are run are available on the Graphs sub task 3 Ifthe Run and View Graph button is selected the Graph for the report selected will be displayed in PNG format Viewing Graphs Once a graph is run you can view the output in the User Console under Graphs gt Reports Graphs Deleting Graphs Deleting a graph only deletes the
158. ds and settings specific to the Threshold you choose from the list or pick from the drop down menu At the top of the task pane are several buttons New Copy Delete New Folder Edit Folder and Delete Folder iQ Nem jo E EI PES EE To create a folder click the New Folder button A dialog box will appear New Folder Please enter folder name Create Folder Type in a name for the new folder and then click the Create Folder button NOTE To edit a folder highlight the folder from the hierarchy in the middle pane and then click the Edit Folder button or to delete a folder highlight it and then click the Delete Folder button To create a new Threshold click the New button 111 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD D Select an Alert Threshold from the drop down list T O New Folder B AMO Delete Folder Filter System Alert Threshold E Render High Traffic Alert Threshold 1250 is Offline Reader Noise Alert Threshold Reader Offline Alert Threshold Reader Tag Capacity Alert Threshold Zone Manager Offline Alert Threshold The configuration fields and settings for the Threshold then appear in the right pane Configuring Alert Thresholds The following areas and settings are available for configuring Thresholds Basic Information The following fields comprise the Basic Information configuration settings for Thresholds
159. e e Modbus Integration Module e ServerTech Sentry Power Manager SPM Integration e Statistical Engine and Adaptive Thresholds These premium features are licensed once and are then available regardless of the number of assets defined in the system NOTE If you need more licenses please contact your RF Code Sales representative 15 gm om m vm V li a o tm FA de ar y r5 E T I ru A TN 742 r O ol Ae o Ta yn Y la le PSI VAYA po ap srl M sus 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com v RF COD Installing Asset Manager In order to install Asset Manager you must ensure that the application server and the database server if you are installing these components on different servers meets minimum system requirements System Requirements For production environments adhere to the following system requirements when preparing your hardware operating system and database for Asset Manager Operating Systems Supported e 64 bit Windows 7 e 64 bit Windows 2008 Server e 64 bit Windows 2012 Server e 64 bit Red Hat Enterprise Linux RHEL 5 5 6 4 e 64 bit CentOS Linux 5 5 6 6 e 64 bit Oracle Linux 5 5 6 5 Databases Supported e PostgreSQL version 8 3 Preferred Version 9 e Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2012 e IBM DB2 v9 7 Hardware Requirements Table The following table provides the minimum hardware specifi
160. e Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 8 Complete the relevant form fields Name Email John Doe Email Address es jdoe yourcompany com La Asset Manager Actions Seal Alert Source SOURCE aName Alert State STATE Alert Severity SEVERITY Alert Start Time 45TART TIME Alert Resolve Times 4 RESOLVE TIME Alert DESCRIPTION Alert Value SOMES EAD ATWUNUEUR S 4SOURCE THRESHOLD VALUE Aron Bert Cos wre infowmation insert Macro NOTE There ate other fields you can complete to enable other features but they are not required for simple email alerts Repeat Alert Action to repeat the email alert Alert Action Repeat Interval to choose the time interval you want the alert email to be repeatedly sent using Alert When Resolved to inform you when the alert is resolved 9 Click the Save Changes button 10 Click on the Thresholds tab under Alert Management 11 In the Asset Alert Threshold window choose Humidity Alert Threshold from the drop down menu 119 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com H CODZ 12 Scroll down to the Alert Actions field and then click the Ellipsis button BB Asset Manager Thresholds wee Alert Threshold Coated Bb racer Asai Threshold Leeabbet Profle admin i ort was d fox bu
161. e detailed information about entities in Asset Manager refer to the Asset Manager Data Model Download Errors 25 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD The Asset Manager Data Model Object Types The Asset Manager data model centers around the definition of and interaction with a family of core object types Each of these object types plays a role in supporting and defining the behavior and features of the Asset Manager system and many of the object types interact with one another to bring this about Most of the object types require instances to have a globally unique object ID GUID an alphanumeric case sensitive identifier string that must be unique and cannot be changed during an objects life cycle Entity Entity objects provide the main interface for interacting with the Asset Manager An Entity object represents a single instance of an asset or tag with one or more associated properties or attributes Each Entity object has a single well known attribute named type which represents the base type of the Entity The type of the Entity corresponds to an existing Entity Type object Each Entity must have a unique object ID An Entity object has zero or more associated Attribute objects Each Attribute corresponds to a single property of the Entity The available attributes of the entity are defined by the entity s Entity Type objects
162. e first two advanced reader configuration settings are Authentication and Up Connect settings The third Position Settings as well as the Advanced settings area and those that follow it are very rarely changed Authentication User ID Password Confirm Password Up Connect Settings Up Connection Enabled Up Connection Reader ID Up Connection Password Confirm Password Position Settings Position Source Authentication e User ID Enter your user name or user ID e Password Enter a password e Confirm Password Enter the same password again Up Connect Settings e Up Connection Enabled If you are configuring an Up Connection Reader that you would like to go active and receive and transmit tag data once you configure it within Asset Manager Sensor Manager this box should be checked Please refer to the Reader Configuration Utility User Manual for more information found in the zip file with the Reader Configuration Utility here http www tfcode com helpdesk downloads Dropbox Public Utilities RECodeRCU zip 220 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD e Up Connection Reader ID The ID that was assigned when you configured your reader as an up connection reader should be entered in this field e Up Connection Password If you assigned a password when you configured your Up Connection reader with the Re
163. e for which no value is available and there is no default value specified the Modbus Slave device will return the default register value of 0 NOTE If you choose to provide a default value for a Boolean attribute you should specify a value which is not used to indicate an alerting condition for the attribute Define a Slave ID for this set of sensors to expose NOTE A valid range for the Slave ID is 1 247 Modbus Device Settings C 5 Slave Device IDs Slave ID Number Of Devices 1 5000 s Add Slave NOTE The number of assets which can report values is determined by the number of attributes configured for a Modbus Slave Device For example if the administrator chooses to publish temperature and humidity values for a Modbus Slave Device there are a total of 2500 unique assets which can publish values for a given Slave ID There are 10 000 Holding Registers Each attribute temperature and humidity requires 2 registers to publish a value for a total of 4 registers per asset 10 000 registers per Slave ID 4 registers per asset 2 500 assets per Slave ID If the number of assets which match the configured Modbus Asset Filter is expected to exceed the total number of assets which can be published for single Slave Device additional Slaves can be configured NOTE Asset Manager Modbus Slaves ate flexible Slave IDs can support a single attribute type or multiple attribute types per Modbus Slave ID Set any Asset Filters y
164. e g Data Center or Row of Racks as seen below The following is a Summaty Asset configuration screen for a Data Centet 60 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 61 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Using Calculated Attributes with Summary Assets Another type of attribute that is available to Summary Assets is called the Calculated Attribute A Calculated Attribute applies a formula that takes data from one or more attributes performs some calculation or evaluation of the data and then stores the result in the Calculated Attribute itself This application of a formula is similar to how they work in a spreadsheet Calculated Attributes are automatically updated recalculated when any dependency data changes This is an extremely powerful feature that provides great flexibility in customization A simple example of a Calculated Attribute on a Summary Asset would be a simple count of the number of assets in the Summary Asset Remember that the Summary Asset represents a location as well Calculated Attributes on a Summary Asset have access to the data stored in the attributes of the Summary Asset itself as well as access to the data of all of the assets in the Summary Asset location Calculated Attributes can easily produce summary information about the population of
165. e in Windows will look like the following m Windows OS C amp Program Files RF Code Asset Manager Include in library Share with Mame di conf de jetty de jre winbd de lib Li mib de yajsw Je zonemgr datadir application ico Date modified 3 22 2013 11 34 AM 3 22 2013 11 34 AM 3 22 2013 11 34 AM 3 22 2013 11 34 AM 3 22 2013 11 34 AM 3 22 2013 11 34 AM 3 22 2013 11 34 AM 3 20 2013 9 20 AM Mew folder Type File folder File folder File folder File folder File folder File folder File folder Icon fay launch 3 20 2013 9 20 AM Internet Shortcut fai registration 3 20 2013 9 20 AM Internet Shortcut uninsO00 dat 3 22 2013 11 34 AM DAT File unins000 exe 3 22 2013 11 34 AM Application The folders of particular interest are the following e conf contains the system properties file e jetty contains log files that are often useful for troubleshooting e zonemgt datadir contains the Zone Manager database and files when it is installed with Asset Manager The System Properties File The system properties file contains configuration directives for the software that may not be set inside the database or may be needed in order to connect to the database when the service 1s started Changes made to this file are preserved when Asset Manager 1s upgraded The file is modified whenever database connection parameters are changed within the Asset Manager software Additionally di
166. e name of the link changes depending on which console you are using and will always display the name of the console that you are not currently using 25 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Bookmarks At the top left of the web console is the Bookmarks Menu the Add Bookmark button immediately to the right of the Bookmarks Menu and the Configure Bookmarks button immediately to the right of the Add Bookmark button Asset Manager Administration Dashboard Bookmarks The Bookmarks Menu is simply a drop down menu that lets you go quickly to any Bookmark you have added and configured The Add Bookmark button lets you add a new Bookmark of your current page location and view to the Bookmarks Menu To add a new Bookmark perform the following steps 1 Click the Add Bookmarks button Final Asset Manager Administration Dashboard Bookmark tispa FE J Administrator 1 Logged In admin 127 0 0 1 2 Give the Bookmark a Name and then click OK E Asset Manager Administration Dashboard e Iz Teo I Lo Please enter a name for this bookmark ac The new Bookmark appears as a choice in the Bookmarks Menu 26 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com To configure your Bookmarks perform the following steps 1 Click the Configure bookmarks
167. e provides a complete deployment guide for environmental monitoring deployments intended to measure and track RCI and RTT in data centers using RF Code readers and sensor tags This document can be found on the RF Code Support web site here http support rfcode com customer portal articles 976954 39 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD Creating an Asset Export File to Import Assets in Bulk After successfully installing and configuring a base collection of tags and a single reader and after also configuring Asset Manager to display and report on assets you can then add a large group of assets at once with Asset Manager Export and Import functions First you create an export template based on existing Inventory Sensor and or Summary Location Assets with their associated Attributes the ones you entered manually so that you can use the same structure and detail for them within Asset Manager By using a template and an external spreadsheet you do not have to enter a large group of Assets manually one at a time This process also facilitates the use of a barcode scanner An exported Asset template which is a CSV file is used to populate Asset Manager with a large group of Assets and the tags associated with them To export a template follow these instructions 1 Inthe User Console go to Assets gt Manage Assets 2 Click the Export button
168. e the default Administrator sa password Doing so will prevent AM from being able to connect to the database for initial setup and initialization 8 Accept the Microsoft SQL Server Express license agreement and then click next 9 Accept the default installation directories 10 Accept the default Named Instance Instance ID and Instance root directory and then click Next 11 Accept the default database engine settings and then click Next 12 Configure the error reporting settings and then click Next 13 Specify the service accounts 17 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Ports Used by Asset Manager The following table lists the ports that are used by Asset Manager by default however you can change these later if necessary within the Asset Manager web console PORT Use Application rm SPM integration 6580 HTTP Interface 6581 HTTPS Interface 6503 Reader Up Connect Port 6502 Zone Manager Updates Port 502 Modbus Slave Port if enabled 8686 JMX Monitor Port if enabled 47808 BACnet Slave Port if enabled Installing with Microsoft SQL Server Professional Asset Manager stores all data about assets locations history and users in a database that is external to the server software NOTE As of Asset Manager v2 8 Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and SQL Server 2012 as well as PostgreSQL 8 3 and DB2 are supported databases Microsoft
169. e the following Delete Failed The item could not be deleted Asset Manager Cannot Connect to the local Microsoft SOL Express Database The other major category of error messages appear more like programming or code based error messages Some of these are known issues with various versions of Asset Manager and therefore the best solution is to upgrade Asset manager to the latest version However no code is completely without error so please bring these to the attempt of RF Code Support An example of this kind of error is the following java io L OException Server returned HTTP response code 415 for URL Log Files The Log Files section of the Appendix contains information about finding and viewing log files The Asset Manager log files will contain details about how the code is being executed and why certain tasks might be performing in unexpected ways or not at all Again contact RF Code Support for assistance if you need to review log files in order to troubleshoot an issue 216 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com ul gt J v RFCOD RF Code Asset Manager logs are and have been part of the HTTP API since Asset Manager version 2 5 In the links below IP Address of Asset Manager 1s the IP address of the Asset Manager application server NOTE For versions of Asset Manager earlier than 2 5 the logs can only be found at the following file path on t
170. e useful for attributes of type typeref list For example an expected location attribute may contain more than one location In this case the Entity object should not inherit the attributes of the expected location The Entity should only inherit attributes of its actual location Entity Type Properties pane us ae ate this entity type in detail Deletable Describes whether or not a user can delete this attribute class Attribute Class objects defined by Asset Manager and not a user are marked as non deletable Entity Type Attribute Entity Type Attributes are objects representing user defined attributes of an Entity Type 260 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Entity Type Attribute Properties If true upon creation of an Entity a user must provide a value for this attribute Static A static entity type attribute 1s an attribute which is an instance of the Entity Type and not the Entity In this case the Entity Type stores the current value and the history of the attribute For example a location Entity Type defines a static attribute named city with the value Austin All Entities which have a typeref attribute whose value is location then will also have an attribute named city with the value Austin A non static entity type attribute makes an attribute available for the Entity to define For exam
171. eader only has Noise Floor Channel A as an exception attribute then even if Reader State is a column attribute the reader state changes will not be reported as column rows instead the reader state column will report whatever the reader state was when Noise Floor Channel A changed value F Mor Connected Address Reader State Description Enabled GPS Status Nane Nose Fibor Channel A Nose Floor Channel B Onina Status Reader Femware Vorsaon If no exception attributes are specified then all of the column attributes are used as exception attributes for the report Report Columns Attributes The final section of the report editor is the Report Columns section This section lets you choose what information will appear in the report columns By default the Name attribute is always in the list By clicking the Ellipsis button the following window will appear to allow more columns to be selected F or Connected Address Descnption Enabled GPS Status Nowe Fioor Channel A Nose Fibor Channel B Onine Status Reader Firmware Verson Reader State Use the left and right arrows to move attributes between the available and selected list boxes Use the up and down arrows to order the attributes in the selected list box and consequently in the Report itself 143 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD On
172. eb console therefore it is not absolutely necessary although turning off this port will prevent you from being able to log into the web console The port that Asset Manager and Zone Manager both use to communicate with readers is the legacy port 6500 therefore this is the only port that absolutely must remain open By default SSL is enabled default HTTPS port 6581 is listening with a self signed SSL certificate Steps for configuring a CA sioned SSL certificate can be found in the Configuring SSL Certificates for use with RF Code Readers section Blocking HTTP Access in Asset Manager To configure Asset Manager to block HTTP access from external requests perform the following steps 1 From the host running Asset Manager go to Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services and stop the Asset Manager service 2 Edit the System Properties file in Asset Manager Install Path conf directory by removing the line http port 6580 3 Save the file 4 Re start the Asset Manager service Now only oca host can get to port 6580 A request from an external host cannot Preliminary Steps for Using SSL Certificates with RF Code Readers By default when HTTPS is enabled a self signed 10 year SSL certificate is generated so that communication on the HTTPS port is encrypted To communicate with both encryption and authentication an SSL certificate must be digitally signed by a well known certificate authority CA Please conta
173. ed in the post condition section of the graph definition then report rows will be produced for all attribute value changes for any zone manager that had a value for online status at least once during the graph s time period In other words the graph may produce data points for attribute changes that happen when the online status did not have a value but ONLY if at least one point of data in the graph for that Zone Manager has an online status value 151 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Graph Columns Attributes The Graph Columns section allows for the selection of which information will appear in the graph Columns Attributes Noise Floor Channel A Noise Floor Channel B Appearance Graph Size Background Color Line Thickness Group Axis by Unit Show graph grid Graph legend location By clicking the Ellipsis button button the following window will appear to allow columns to be selected G3 naro Nowa Fior Channo A E Nowe Finor Channel B 152 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Graph Appearance The final section of the graph editor is the Appearance section Appearance Graph Size 1024 x 768 Background Color Line Thickness Group Axis by Unit FFFFFF 2 Fl Show graph grid E Graph legend
174. electing Delete 169 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD Table Choosing this layout option and dragging it to the Dashboard Preview Pane will prompt a Grid Row Columns box where the number of rows and columns for the table will be selected Once the number of row columns desired are entered a blank table will appear in the Dashboard Preview Pane The borders of this table can be manipulated by dragging the edges along the width or the height More than one table can be placed in a Dashboard and tables can be placed within cells of another Table in the Dashboard A table can be removed from the Dashboard by right clicking and selecting the Delete table option Once you have selected a preferred Layout type you will select a Widget type or multiple widget types that you would like to use in the creation of your Dashboard There are fifteen widget types available outlined in the table above To configure your custom Dashboard with widgets select the widget s desired from the Widgets Layouts tree and drag it or them to the Dashboard Preview Pane om Las aes eS ak Ee o es ae Unka ez asset urgssoned Ain tute fevum Tir ADAL qudm fX The Peet Lum the foe Gn When you drag a widget to the Dashboard Preview Pane you will see a Widgets Settings pane appear It is here that you will configure the widget to use the Attributes of the Asset s
175. eleting Asset Types To delete an Asset Type perform the following steps 1 Navigate in the Admin Console to Data Schema gt Asset Type The Asset Type task pane will appear on the right 2 Select the Asset Type you wish to delete from the Asset Type hierarchy tree and then click the Delete button NOTE You can only delete an Asset Type if it is not in use If any assets of the selected type have been added to the system you will receive a notification that the Asset Type cannot be deleted such as the error message below Delete Asset Type x The tem could not be deleted Cannot delete type Handheld PC There are one or more objects which are defined using the type NOTE If you receive the notification that an Asset Type is in use you must first delete all of the assets of the specified type via the User Console before the Asset Type can be deleted After you delete an Asset Type it will be removed from the Asset Type hierarchy tree Asset Templates In the User Console you can create templates to facilitate the addition of new assets Asset templates are also well suited to adding assets with use of a barcode scanner The asset template can have one or more attributes already filled in with default data to avoid reentering repetitive data for multiple assets that are being added to the system Views are used in the Dashboard and Assets Task to define which attributes are included in the view when displaying the asset list The vie
176. en e Fluid Sensor Count e Intake Humidity Link Hidden e Intake Temp Link Hidden e Last Door Opened e Max Exhaust Humidity e Max Exhaust Temperature e Max Intake Humidity e Max Exhaust Temperature e Maximum Humidity e Maximum Temperature e Minimum Humidity e Minimum Temperature e Minimum Humidity e Newest Asset Age months e Oldest Asset Age months e Rack Active Power e Rack Apparent Power e Rack Cooling Index RCI HI e Rack Cooling Index RCI LO e Rack Door Status Link hidden e Rack Power Capacity e Rack Temperature Delta 241 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD e RCI HD Violation e RCI LO Violation e Return Temperature Index RTT e Room Active Power e Room Apparent Power e Row Active Power e Row Apparent Power e Sensor Offline Link Hidden e Total Asset Value e Total Rack Cooling Index RCI HI e Total Rack Cooling Index RCI LO e Total Row Weight Capacity e Total U Space Available U s e Total U Space Capacity U s e Total U Space Utilized U s e Total Weight Available e Total Weight Utilized e Under Warranty e Used U Space Capacity Vo e Used Weight Capacity e Warranty Expiration Date e Weighted CRAC Return Temp e Weighted CRAC RTI Cooling e Weighted CRAC Supply Temp The schema contains the following Custom Attribute Types e Asset Life
177. epartments buildings or entire organizations All current and historical Asset Attributes such as financial information physical location and contractual information can be maintained in a database enabling complete asset life cycle management Inventory reports are available at the touch of a button so users can proactively respond to audits and automate their regulatory compliance efforts When deployed with RF Code s active RFID tags and readers physical asset location is tracked in real time to quickly locate and identify equipment for maintenance and service avoiding costly downtime Automated alerts and reports can be configured for immediate notification of asset location or condition changes delivering savings in both cost and time Asset Manager s secure browser based enterprise web console requires no software to be installed or maintained on user systems and role based user accounts make it easy for system administrators to control who can view and who can modify asset details and conditions within the deployment environment RF Code Asset Manager combined with RF Code s active RFID hardware provides an end to end solution for real time asset tracking and environmental monitoring In addition Asset Manager can greatly enhance existing DCIM systems The major components of the Asset Manager system are the following e Active RFID tags e REID tag readers e The Asset Manager server e The Asset Manager web console e Optio
178. er Groups are created and managed here for a more efficient security model when dealing with multiple users Configuration of LDAP authentication for user authentication is handled here Track user activities such as logins and major system modifications in this section fa wae Ne PT EI qa Rr maf NS ELT S e En a PN Har Yecy Waterford Centre Blvd culte 500 Austin LA 7 0 75 RFCOD Create modify schedule and run detailed Reports in this Manage Reports section reports are related to system activity not assets in this section Create modify schedule and run detailed Graphs in this Manage Graphs section graphs are related to system activity not assets in this section Manage and create the potential actions for Reports amp Actions l AM Graphs i e email actions to send graphs BIRT Templates Configure advanced reports A porn Create and modify the output mechanisms for sending data ctions from events outside of Asset Manager e g email snmp traps Roughly equivalent to a threshold triggers allow for filters and Triggers parameters to be set on system metrics to enable events to be sent A View active and historical alerts generated by threshold Alert Viewer breeches Create and modify the output mechanisms for sending data Actions from alarms alerts outside of Asset Manager e g email samp traps Thresholds Parameters and filters for defining when a system level alert should be triggered Opt
179. erent Locations in the Location Hierarchy NOTE Almost without exception you will choose one of the first two Rules either Match by Simple SSI or Match by IR Locator If neither of these Rules seems to be working for whatever reason please contact RF Code Support for assistance before adding one of the other Rules to the Location Hierarchy Rule Type Match by Simple SSI Location based on threshold SSI values for one or more reader channels at least one must be above the threshold Match by IR Locator Location based on received values for the itlocator attribute on tags with IR sensors with optional restriction on reporting reader channels atch by Average SSI ocation based on threshold average of SST values for one or more reader channels atch by strongest SSI relative to Location based on tag SSI as in Match by Simple SST Rute except that at least one reference tag must also reference tags be present and above a minimum SSI atch by SST when near to ocation based on reader s proximity to a reference tag thus causing all tag trans missions received by the reference tag reader to conform to the reference tag s SSI values or Zone atch by Portal Entry Exit SST Location based on threshold SSI values for one or more reader channels divided into inside and outside sets and matching the location if the current or most recent best match was a channel in the inside set atch if near GPS matching ocation based
180. es the formatting di Asset Manager Manage Assets By Location 3W y Austr Onta Center y My Mob e Location Trt Sensor 47 My Unison Location T H Sensor 48 Temp Sensor 14 Temp Sensor 90 Tet Sensor 31 db Manage Assets db Manage Assets By Locaton Qb anno Assets By Type de cer Assets Te Sensor 117 Asset Suter loba Temp Sensor 234 Tere Senser 151 Temp Sensor 181 Temp Sensor 206 Temp Sensor 210 Temp Sensor 230 Temp Sensor 226 Tet Sensor 10 TeH Sensor 113 85 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFECOD To configure conditional formatting for an Attribute perform the following steps I 2 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com In the Admin Console go to Data Schema gt Status Attributes zu Asset Manager Administration Status Attributes e Ts z Dashboard amp Configuration E Integration ey Locations Rules Maps T Asset Attributes 7 Status Attributes Calculated Asset A tes Bookmarks Cm Dashboard SY Configuration e Integration snm y Locations Rules Maps e 7 Asset Attributes 7 Status Attributes Calculated Asset Attributes di Asset Types EB Data Schema Filter A T Activation Count 1 Activation Count 2 T Activation Input 1 7 Activation Input 2 74 Active Alert Count Aler
181. eshold Filter Asset Type The asset type is configured for you based on the type of system alert threshold you have selected First Attribute The first attribute is configured for you based on the type of system alert threshold you have selected First Attribute Value Operator The value operator is configured for you based on the type of system alert threshold you have selected First Attribute Value The value is configured for you based on the type of system alert threshold you have selected 112 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD e Second Attribute Choose a second attribute you would like to filter by e Second Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected e Second Attribute Value Enter the value that will be compared to if applicable based on the operator selected e Third Attribute Choose a third attribute you would like to filter by e Third Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected e Third Attribute Value Enter the value that will be compared to if applicable based on the operator selected e Threshold Delay Enter a value here if you would like to delay a period of time before triggering an alert once the conditions have been met Copying Alert Thresholds A copy of a Threshold can be made so that a user can quickly build a new Threshold based
182. et object IDs Asset Manager has assigned to each attribute published via BACnet 206 X 512 439 2199 www rfcode com O PO PO C3 gt TI C x Con 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 22 RF COD Navigate to Admin Console gt Integration gt BACnet Slave Object IDs On the right hand panel there is a list of the currently defined BACnet Slave Devices The administrator can select a slave device and view the BACnet object IDs Asset Manager has assigned to each attribute value There may be several Object IDs depending on the type and number of attributes that you specified Name Asset Tag Asset Type Dew Point Object ID Temperature Object ID Humidity Object ID Asset 3 Test HUMRCK0000018 Humidity amp Temper 6 Asset 2 Tost HUMRCKO00000164 Humidity amp Temper O Asset 1 Tost HUMRCK0000001 Humidity amp Temper 3 The entire BACnet Object ID attribute mapping for a BACnet Slave Device can be exported in XML CSV or PDF format to allow a BACnet administrator to conveniently configure BACnet client software To export these Object IDs use the Export XML Export CSV or Export PDF buttons Access your BACnet system to configure your BACnet client software and complete the integration NOTE For information regarding how to integrate your BACnet system please refer to your BACnet client manuals ot refer to the BACnet website http www bacnet org NOTE RF Code is a registered BAC
183. etails Reports Graphs Add Edit Report Graph Definition Reports Graphs Run a Report or Graph Location View Type View Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes e e o Y S e M S Yes Yes S O O S O S Yes S O S n lt o e e lt es Yes Z O o po o po o O No e lt es Yes O o es es Yes Yes Yes Yes O Reports Graphs View and Export Reports and Graphs Yes Report Graph Actions Create Copy and Test S Report Graph Actions Delete es Report Graph BIRT Templates Create Yes Report Graph BIRT Templates Delete Yes c Events Actions Create Copy and Test e Ye Ye Events Actions Delete Events Triggers Create and Copy S S S Event Triggers Delete Alerts View Alerts Alerts Delete Alerts Alerts Pause Updates Alerts Acknowledge Alerts Alerts Manage Alert Actions Alerts Manage Thresholds Status Bar Logout Status Bar About Help Status Bar Switch Console Link Status Bar Display Open Alerts Information Using Macros 9229 Waterford Centre D lvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78 Yes es Yes Yes Yes Yes es c t es Yes Yes Yes c es e lt Yes e o e o lee lee o lolo lo 2 O S Yes Z Z o o ekek S 9 o O Yes 758 Tel 51 Reporter w Alerts amp Events lt Z O Z O Z O
184. field 125 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 TeL 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RI COD How to Set Up a Temperature Alert Thresholds are limits for specific attribute values Alerts are notifications you will receive if the value of a particular attribute goes beyond the threshold set for it For example you can set a threshold for a sensor tag s temperature reading to be 80 F and have an alert sent when the temperature exceeds this threshold To configure a basic threshold and alert perform the following steps 1 Inthe User Console go to Alert Management 2 Click Actions and then click the New button 3 Choose Email Alert Action from the drop down menu 4 Give the alert a name and enter the email address of the alert recipient 5 Click Save Changes 6 Select Temperature Alert Threshold from the dropdown list 7 Give the alert threshold a Name e g Rack too hot 8 Inthe Alert Condition section set the Threshold Attribute Value Operator e g Greater Than gt 9 Set the Threshold Attribute Value e g 80 Alert Severity Enabled Type Of Alert To Create User Required To Acknowledge Alert Security Execubon User Account Alert Condition Threshold Attribute Threshold Attribute Value Operator Threshold Attribute Value Threshold Delay 126 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 21
185. figuration Database 4 SMTP Server r License Key Import Configuration amp Export Configuration amp Tao Groups Mg Zone Managers y Zone Manager Status kal Readers License Key 2 4 Click the OK button The license key will then appear in the list with the license key parameters of License Count Expiration Date and License Key Type Y Asset Manager Administration License Keys eomais o pEr Cere Oee RE Dashboard B Configuration Qowee fO mme 1 or 1 License Keys 4 SMTP Server Import Configuration Asset Licenses In Use Active and Retired 0 3 Export Configuration Total Unexpired Asset Licenses 1000 _ amp Tag Groups a Available Asset Licenses 1000 one Managers 30 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 5 Go back to the Dashboard gt System Status area You will see that the Configuration status for License Key s has changed to display a green checkmark CH Dashboard Filter J Administrator 1 Logged In Component Configured E i admin 127 0 0 1 admin Database Connection Sys Zone Manager s Reader s Tag Group s 5 System Status License Key s Adding and Configuring Readers After you have configured one or more readers through the reader web console or reader configuration utility RCU you then need to add your reader s to Asset Manager For further details
186. figuration Alert Management is used to configure the types and parameters of system generated notifications when certain conditions occur so that end users can manage the state and status of assets and the environment that is being monitored The Administrator Console is divided into two main regions or panes The left side is the navigation pane where the tasks and sub tasks are located To the right of this is the task pane which contains several varying task panes depending on the main and sub task selected The administrator console also contains an information bar on the bottom of the screen which contains two main features e User Indicator shows the username or admin who is currently logged on and using the web console session e Bottom Navigation Links Logout Link About Help User Console Admin Console Logout Click Logout to end the current web console session Link Click Link to create a URL string that can be copied and pasted to send in an email or pasted into a browser window or browser tab An alternate URL copy paste option is to create a URL string that will open the active window pane e g to open the configuration settings pane for a specific asset type or attribute About Click About to show the version of Asset Manager Help Click Help to open the administration and usage guide as a PDF file User Console Click User Console to switch to the User Console from the Admin Console In the same place
187. figuration and software settings The first task is the initial connection of the Asset Manager software to the database unless SQL Server Express 2008 was installed as part of the Asset Manager installation If it was installed then a database is already created and configured for Asset Manager but can still be changed or managed by following these directions The following steps must be taken for initially connecting Asset Manager to a new production database Configuring a Production Database You can configure a production database following one of the two methods described below depending on your needs Method A This method applies when using an SQL Server or PostgreSQL with Mixed Mode Authentication turned on 18 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com ET EN RFCOD 1 eS o E 9 In your Database Management Application create a New Database and create or authorize a User with full access to the new database Install Asset Manager NOTE Do not check the Install SQL Express checkbox Click the Asset Manager icon after the installation is complete and then login as admin admin Select the database type Enter the correct hostname database name user ID and password Click Test Click OK NOTE The Asset Manager service will restart and after 3 5 minutes the database will be populated with the minimal amount of data and the Asset Manager
188. figuration ues 4 Logged In Sub Task Menu Papo Contguied P Mes 019724 DatshaseComecton of 1013911 Zone Managers 108 65 114 234 Readers Y aman 10 128 100 Toy Groopis Y License Kept Toggle Between User Console amp Admin Console 2 Asset Reporter And Alert lt 1 Logged in deme 209 234 146 104 Readers Dtme Mame Hormame Mus Roster Sxats POU Demo Reade 192 16 006 CONHECTE AE URE POU Demo Readers 192 168 066 CMNECTFALURE POU Demo Reader 192 168066 CONHECTFALLIRE POU Demo Reade 192 168066 C CTFAK URE n There are two primary views consoles in Asset Manager e Admin Console Access this console by clicking the Admin Console link in the lower right corner of the web console of Asset Manager This console is typically used for administrative functions of the server and where a large portion of this document focuses It could be considered the Control Panel of your Asset Manager This is where most of the initial configuration is done e User Console Access this console by clicking the User Console link in the lower right corner of the web interface This console is for managing and viewing sensors alerts dashboards reports graphs etc This is where the final configuration and daily use of Asset Managet is done NOTE Switching between the Admin Console and the User Console is done by clicking either the Admin Console or the User Console link at the bottom right of the user interface Th
189. figuring FTP Alert Actions Transfer Protocol Select FTP or SFTP Secure File Transfer Protocol Remote Directory Specify the remote directory path where the file will be saved Macro values can be used to specify the directory File Name Specify the file name where alert information will be saved Macros can be used to specify the file name Primary Host Input the hostname of the FTP server Primary Port Select the Port over which to communicate with the FTP server by default port 21 for FTP or 22 for SFTP Secondary Host Input the hostname of the secondary sever to post to if posting to the primary server is unsuccessful optional Secondary Port Select the Port over which to communicate with the secondary FTP server Username Password Confirm Enter the username and password for your FTP server if you have one and confirm it Configuring HTTP Post Alert Actions Primary HTTP URL Specify the URL that you would like to post the alert to Secondary HTTP URL Specify a secondary URL that you would like to post the alert to if posting to the primary server is unsuccessful SSL Select if you would like to use SSL HTTP Username Password Specify the HTTP username and password if you plan to use one Additional Attributes Select any additional attributes you would like to post for the alert Configuring Logging Alert Actions e Log Entry Format Select either JSON or XML logging format e Destination Direc
190. file to determine which of your Assets or other entities did not import into the system and why The error message is presented at the bottom of each entity s section so you can examine the characteristics of the entity to determine what needs to be fixed me to Py Jg e Ln ch H Oc na ww M LO co G Po Bo Pi Bo Ri Bo Po Ro Ri tal a The Job Message column lists the number of Assets and or Attribute that were successfully imported m ty class entity guid DATA CENTER RACK Sr 0cd retired false deletrtable true SaServiceDate 2012 11 07 RCILOW VIOLATION false RCIHI VIOLATION false MAX EXHAUST HUMIDITY null RACK COOLING INDEX LOW 100 0 SaName Rack 02 01 SaExpectedLocation MAX INTAKE HUMIDITY 29 SaLocationPath tLocation IBM SaScope S aLocation RACK 02 01 type DATA CENTER RACK Caleacriprion om TEMPERATURE DELTA null ANY DOORS LAST OPENED null SaLastUpdateTime 2012 11 08 18 34 SaLocation RACK 02 01 SaLastUpdateUser admin MAX INTAKE 28 5 RACK COOLING INDEX HIGH 50 0 MAX EXHAUST TEMPERATURE null ANY SENSOR OFFLINE true ANY DOOR OPEN null RACK ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING INTAKE AND EXHAUST Car Error Attribute class RCILOW VIOLATION was not found class entity 255 9229 Waterford Centre
191. formation with the exception of the following macros which only output a partial date or time DATE YEAR MONTH DAY TIME HOUR MINUTE SECOND MILLISECOND TIMEZONE_OFFSET 96 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Configuration Settings for File Transfer Actions Using FTP or SFTP SSH File Transfer The following settings are available when configuring FTP or SFTP SSH File Transfer Post Alert Actions File Transfer Information Transfer Protocol FTA Remote Directory SOURCE ID DATE File Name TIME TRIGGER_TYPE Primary Host Primary Port Secondary Host Secondary Port Username Password IIIITITITIITIT Confirm Password IIITIITITITITIT Data Connection Active Mode Additional Event Information Additional Attributes Name Asset Location Description e Transfer Protocol Select FTP or SFTP e Remote Directory Specify the remote directory path where the file will be saved Macro values can be used to specify the directory e File Name Specify the file name where the event information will be saved Macros can be used to specify the file name e Primary Host Input the hostname of the FTP server e Primary Port Select the Port over which to communicate with the FTP server by default this is 21 e Secondary Host Input the hostname of the secondary sever to post to if posting to the
192. from the left pane of Tasks or by clicking on either the name of the most recent alert or on the notification of how many alerts there are open When you click the link the Alert Viewer opens and shows details for all of the Open Alerts Type Status Attribute Operator Value System Alert Open w w w Alert State AssetType Alert Severity Alert 5tart Time Alert Resolve Time Alert Message Open Reader Offline Critical 2013 05 15 13 09 16 The reader db idcc is offline Alert Actions Alert Actions ate similar to Event Actions except in addition to the six Event Actions available you can also create and configure a Serial Device Send Alert Action Creating Alert Actions This sub task lets you create automated responses to alert conditions There following alert actions available e Email Alert Action e File Transfer Alert Action e HTTP Post Alert Action e Logging Alert Action e Serial Device Send Alert Action e SNMP V1 Trap Alert Action e SNMP V3 Alert Action To create an Alert Action perform the following steps 1 Select the Alert Management task 2 Select the Actions sub task 106 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com H CODzZ ES Events amp Alert Management I Alert Viewer Actions t Thresholds 3 Click New and then select an alert action from the drop down list or select a pre existing action to edit
193. g and therefore which asset is in which location By doing this you can also associate the asset locations to a custom map in order to provide a visual representation of your assets and sensor data Correctly configuring the location hierarchy requires careful planning While the hierarchy and individual locations can be edited the process of creating rules and associating assets to the individual levels in the hierarchy is one that takes some time and effort to undo When you associate locations ot zones to your reader s the system can then with the assistance of the Zone Manager s interpret tag location data dynamically Assigning various rules to locations can help to fine tune the interpretation of tag location through the specification of reader channels and SSI threshold settings For more about readers and reader settings refer to the Advanced Reader Configuration setting in the Appendix NOTE Location names must be unique so it is common practice to string Location level names together in order to uniquely identify each Location especially at the most granular layers For example most data centers have multiple rows of server racks therefore simply naming a Location Rack 1 even though it might exist under two different row layers e g Row 1 and Row 2 it is necessary to distinguish the two distinct Rack 1 layers in a manner such as Rack 01 01 and Rack 01 02 ey Asset Manager Administration Locations amp Rules O A
194. g types of Event Actions Email Event Action File Transfer Event Action HTTP Post Event Action Logging Event Action SNMP V1 Trap Event Action and SNMP V3 Event Action The following configuration settings are available for Actions Basic Information system Event Action Basic Information Name ls Action Schedule Enabled Name Name the action and select the Enabled checkbox to enable it Action Schedule By default the Action is set to Always Active However you can click the Ellipsis button to open a window with scheduling options NOTE By default the Events Schedule is set with all days and times enabled Therefore if unchanged the Event Action will execute any time the associated event is triggered In order to disable certain days and or times select the days and or times you want to disable and then click the Disable button 95 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD Alternatively click the Disable All button to disable the event schedule for all days and times and then select those days and or times the Event Action on which should occur and then click the Enable button To enable all day and time slots click the Enable All button Enabled In order for the Alert Action to be active in the system the Enabled checkbox must be checked Configuration Settings Specific to Email Event Actions When you c
195. ger e Trigger Schedule Click the button which will prompt a scheduling window Disable and enable the days times that you would like to schedule this trigger for By default the trigger schedule is set to all days times enabled This means that left in the default state the trigger would occur at all times when the defined trigger conditions have been met To disable certain days times select the day time blocks you would like to disable and click the Disable button Or select the Disable All button which will disable the trigger schedule for all days times To enable certain day time slots select the desired days times and click the Enable button To enable all day time slots click the Enable All button Click the OK button to save the schedule or the Cancel button to cancel the schedule Event Filters The following Event Filters can be configured e Trigger Filter Asset Type Select the entity root for your trigger from the tree Only this entity and the entities under it will be able to trigger this event e Trigger Attributes This is a list of attributes that will be monitored for changes Any time the value for one of these attributes changes for any of the entities specified by the Filter Asset Type field the Asset Manager system will check to see if the rest of the trigger conditions are met by the entity If the conditions are met then the trigger executes the configured actions e First Attribute Select an attribute th
196. glish or Metric System Q How do change the display of values in the web console so that they read as English measurements or metric measurements e g temperatures in Fahrenheit vs Celsius A In the Admin Console go to Security gt Users gt User Preferences gt Units Display and change the setting to English or Browser OS Locale The latter setting will change the display of values to match those of your local computer or regional locale settings To display values in metric measurements set Units Display to Metric Q How do change the display of values reports and alerts so that they read as English measurements or metric measurements e g temperatures in Fahrenheit vs Celsius A In the Admin Console go to Configuration gt Server Panel gt Units and change the setting to English or Server Operating System Locale Reader Configuration with the Reader Configuration Utility In order for Asset Manager to be able to detect your readers the readers must first be configured with the Reader Configuration Utility Below is an overview of the process NOTE For complete instructions refer to the Reader Configuration Utility RCU User Guide which ships with your reader and which is also available from the RF Code Support Document Repository http support rfcode com customer portal articles 722910 To configure a reader with the RCU perform the following steps 1 After installing the application from the CD select Start gt
197. gress of reports that are running and access the data of reports that are complete These reports may have been executed by a user or might have run based on a configured schedule The results of completed reports can be viewed immediately or exported to XML CSV PDF or SQLite formats Manage Graphs This configuration area allows administrators to create graph criteria and to run graphs Once a graph is created and executed the result of the graph is available on the Graphs sub task Graphs This configuration area lets you view the progress of graphs that are running and access the data of graphs that are complete These graphs may have been executed by a user or might have run based on a configured schedule The completed graphs can be viewed immediately or exported to a PNG format Actions This configuration area allow the user to deliver a report or graph to one or more recipients when the report or graph is run either on a schedule or interactively from the user interface You can select from three protocols when creating Actions Email HTTP Post and FTP Once an action is defined it can be assigned to a report in the Manage Reports section mentioned above Any number of actions can be assigned to an individual report and any number of reports can share the same Actions BIRT Templates Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools BIRT is an open source report generation tool developed by the Eclipse Foundation You can
198. he major Task configuration areas in Asset Manager and function the same regardless of where they are created and used 1 Click the New Folder button 52 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD O Asset Manager Asset Templates e Te Jo ter To cor To ve Dore Fiter I Server Asset Austin Data Center Please enter folder name T 1 2 Type in the name and click the Create Folder button to create the new folder The folder will now appear in the Data tree on the left Fier C IT Asset Templates To edit the folder click the Edit Folder button and the Edit Folder Box will appear To delete a folder click the Delete Folder button and the folder will disappear from the data tree 3 Click the Save Folder button to save the new folder changes 53 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD Locations and the Location Hierarchy Locations in Asset Manager represent the physical locations of the assets you are tracking or monitoring The Location Hierarchy reflects the physical locations in your organization or area of deployment The default Location Hierarchy is unpopulated E e Location 8 Unknown Location After defining your location hierarchy you can then associate rules to specific locations in the hierarchy in order to determine which ta
199. he server Program Files1RF Codel Asset Manager jetty logs and will look like the following i Asset Manager jety p logs v ty Searchlogs A m Eee Include in library Share with New folder B7 e Marne Date modified Type Size Ej 2013 03 22 stderrout log 3 22 2013 6 59 PM Text Document 3 508 KB y 2013 03 23 stderrout log 3 23 2013 7 00 PM Text Document 11 272 KB Lj 2013 03 24 stderrout log 3 24 2013 7 00 PM Text Document 11 268 KB Lj 2013 03 25 stderrout log 3 25 2013 7 00 PM Text Document 11 268 KB 2013 03 2b stderrout log 3 25 2013 7 00 PM Text Document 0 KB Jetty service 20130322 logq 3 22 2013 11 34 AM Text Document 1 KB _ jetty service 2013032 log Ick 3 22 2013 11 34 AM LCK File 0 KB Log files can be downloaded at the following URL http lt IP Address of Asset Manager gt 6580 api system files C 10130105 Download All 2012 07 01 siderrout log 881545875 2012 07 02 stderrout log 902444958 2012_07_03 stderrout log 942505990 2012 07 04 stderrout log 930165847 2012 07 05 stderrout log 915347464 2012 07 06 siderrout log 912165523 2012 07 07 stderrout log 933067756 2012 07 0S stderrout log 929416823 2012 07 09 stderrout log 930310296 592652857 57373 21 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD NOTE Log files are organized by date in the form of year_month_day stderrout log To change the
200. he topic 69 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RE COD String If the type is String then an additional area will appear for specifying an optional value constraint of a regular expression which will be used to validate user input Checking the Constrain attribute value to values list checkbox causes the area to expand and provide an entry area for specifying a list of strings that are valid selections When the checkbox is checked and this feature is enabled users cannot type in free form information and instead must choose a pre defined value from the list NOTE Entering unconstrained free form string data can make standardized reporting almost impossible when multiple users are entering data into the system When at all possible use constrained string lists to allow users to select a choice or multiple choices rather than to allow them to enter free form string data However if you do not constrain values to a list then use regular expressions in order to ensure that string data is always in the correct format String List A String List is a restricted list that is populated by a pre defined list of acceptable values The Add Edit and Delete buttons provide mechanisms to manage the items in the list Use the Up and Down buttons to move an item higher or lower in the list Asset Reference When you define an Attribute as an Asset Reference
201. hen that entity is flagged with an error message however the import process continues When an import job completes with errors the system will create an updated import file with those errors containing only the items that the system could not successfully import The user can then modify and correct the generated import file and attempt to reimport the corrected file The system generated error messages are ignored on import so the user does not have to remove this information when re importing a corrected import file If there are errors during the process an import file with errors is generated with a file type that matches the import file type i e if there are errors when importing a JSON file the error log file will also be a JSON file and similarly with CSV files To import an asset import file log into the User Console go to Assets gt Import Assets click the Browse button and find the file and then click the Upload button A pop up window will inform you the import job is queued Asset Import X 1 Import job queued Check job table for import status K The status of the import job will appear in the list of Import Jobs Select the asset file to import Asset File C fakepath assets export 20121113112825 zip Browse W Upload Submitter Start Time End Time Job Filename Job Status Job Message Job Error Filename admin 2013 05 29 09 20 41 20 13 05 29 09 20 41 assets export 20121113112825 zip FAILURE
202. her example is a mobile location such as a truck or a ship both of which are themselves assets but both can also contain other assets Summary Assets and Assets On the User Console Asset objects Assets are created to represent the assets that are being managed and tracked Assets can be inventory items such as computers monitors etc or they can be sensors such as temperature sensors humidity sensors etc Assets can have a vatiety of attributes associated with them such as name serial number asset tag ID location date of installation deployment color weight size cost warranty status sensor values etc Assets can be placed automatically or manually into locations represented by the location tree It is important to understand that Locations and Assets are separate structures that behave differently and which are created in different patts of the system Locations ate not Assets and Assets are not Locations Locations represent places and can only be created on the Administrator Console Assets represent things and are created on the User Console Summary Assets tie the two together Summary Asset Attributes Each type of Summary Asset can have a vatiety of additional attributes to make the definition of the Summary Asset more useful Depending on the type of summary asset the attributes available for configuring it may change and present drop down boxes that help to further define or configure the Summary Asset
203. hoose to create an Email Event Action the following fields and settings are available Event Action Configuration Email Address es support amp rfcode com Event Action Message Event Source 45O0URCE SaMame Event Time 4 TIME Event Trigger Type 4 TRIGGER_TYPE Additional Event Source Information Name SOURCE SaName Asset Location SOURCE aLocation Description 4SQURCE aDescription Insert Macro e Email Address es The email address es that will receive the Event notification e Event Action Message The message about the Event that will be delivered NOTE One or more macros can be configured to generate the Event Action Message The default Event Action Message is configured with macros in the following way Event Source S SOURCE SaName Event Time TIMEF Event Trigger Type TRIGGER TYPE Additional Event Source Information Name SOURCE SaName Asset Location S SOURCE SaLocation Description SOURCE SaDescription For more information refer to the Macros section Configuration Settings for Different Kinds of Event Action Alerts When you choose to create an HTTP Post File Transfer Event or a Logging Event Action Alert the following fields and settings are available For FTP HTTP and Logging actions the information that will be transmitted will be a combination of e The replaced values for all macros available to the action refer to the Macros section for more in
204. igure El admin 127 0 0 1 admin Database Connection ln Zone Manager s Reader s BA System Status Tag Group s License Key s The following sections will explain how to add a License and how to configure one or more Readers and Tag Groups Until you configure each of the five basic System Configuration components there will be a red X next to each The red X will change to a green checkmark Y after you complete the initial configuration for that component The instructions for configuring these primary system components are found in the sections that immediately follow this one however this section provides an overview of the Asset Manager web console in order to help you understand the structure of the web console application and to help you navigate within it 24 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Asset Manager Web Console Overview The Asset Manager web console contains a navigation menu on the left with links and sub links or Tasks and Sub Tasks that you click in order to populate one or more panes of information on the right side These panes will either simply display information about various parts of the Asset Manager system or they will contain additional fields or functions that you can configure L Asset Manager Administration Dask nm f aia puo oce f oor Bl Senn ee ooo Fa Users Ordine Task Navigation Mend System Con
205. import errors 20 130529092041 s Download us s NOTE If the proper dependencies do not exist the import will fail or it will complete with errors The following are all of the possible Job Status values for imports 254 2 439 2199 www rfcode com O PO PO f O J exc CU cr D ms O Q E D m e D UJ a Un A ner T O C3 Q e gt WwW c 3 M CO Sy On CO D Cn hr NM Es LA PO ho E J o zs O Con hs PO REF COD If an import completes with errors click the Download Errors button to open the import file with annotated errors in order COMPLETE The import job completed successfully CREATED The import job was created but it has not begun to import nor entered the import queue QUEUED The import job is waiting for another import job to finish importing RUNNING The file is currently importing COMPLETE WITH ERRORS The file imported some of the data but not all of it The data that was not imported is presented in a file of the same type as the import 1 e a CSV import file will generate a CSV error file and a JSON import with errors generates a JSON file The file contains each entity that failed to import and an error message beneath it giving the reason why FAILURE The file failed to import Information about the reason for the failure can be found in the error file that is generated ACCESS DENIED You do not have permission to import the
206. in TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com B Asset Not in Expected B Gauer Door Open les Test Temp Threshi B Low Battery Alert Thre B cron Alert Thresnois L B Tomper Alert Threshoid Y B Voth Door Open i Warning User Required To Admowledge Alert P Type Of Alert To Create Asset Offine Alert First Attribute Value Operator First Attribute Value Second Attribute Second Attribute Value Operator Second Attribute Value Third Attribute Third Attribute Value Operator Third Attrbute Value 5 Click the Save Changes button at the bottom left of the Asset Alert Threshold window 6 Click the Actions tab under Alert Management 122 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 7 In the Asset Alert Action window choose Email Alert Action from the drop down menu You will then see the following screen BK Asset Manager Actions Search lt RF Code EENES IA CITA EEA es a iene Alen Acton 1 Disabled B vt Trap B vom Text Alert Jduse tb e er Rm la 558 0 Changes 123 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFECOD 8 Complete the relevant form fields Name Email John Doe Email Address es jdoe yourcompany com The fields in the following screenshot are populated with the sample
207. in the Appendix When the Security feature is enabled all Users must be members of some Group other than the default Everyone Group If they are not they will not be able to log in to Asset Manager If they attempt to do so they will be prompted with a message that their account is locked However one quick way to prevent Users from being locked out is to make a copy of the Everyone group and assign to it all Users who are not assigned to any other Group 174 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Creating Groups To define Groups to which Users can be assigned follow these steps 1 Inthe Admin Console go to Security gt Groups 3 Dashboard Filter S Cosbonti n a Everyone dh Integration y Locations Rules Maps a Groups NOTE The Everyone Group is the default Group in the Group tree it encompasses all Users that have been created in Asset Manager and exists to provide a single common Group available to all Users by default 2 Click the New button Configuration fields will appear for the new Group in the right pane Basic Information Name Description Asset And User Console Object Access Unrestricted Access To Assets And User Console Objects Everyone Group Access Can Assign Assets To The Everyone Group Locations And Custom Types Allowed Location And Custom Types All Location And Custom Type
208. in the web console the link will read Admin Console if the user is logged into the User Console 28 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD The User Console The User Console lets Users manage assets and monitor environmental conditions whether the Asset Manager system 1s deployed in a datacenter or elsewhere The User Console provides the following tasks e Dashboard e Tag Management e Customization e Maps e Reports Graphs e Events e Alert Management For screenshots and brief descriptions of all the Tasks and Sub Tasks available in both the Admin Console and the User Console refer to the Admin Console and User Console Task Overview Matrix section in the Appendix Adding Licenses To enter a license key perform the following steps 1 Go to Configuration gt License Keys All license keys are displayed in this area after they are installed Y Asset Manager Administration License Keys EJEA Oe License Key License Count Expiration Date License Key Type Never BACNET Never BIRT Never MODBUS Sn Dashboard S Configuration B Database T License Keys 1 SMTP Server Never ASSET 29 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 2 Click the Add License Key button 1 Asset Manager Administration License Keys ei amp Dashboard Con
209. ined schedule at specific days and or times in the future A Asset Manager Administration Manage Reports de T Ts S 9 9c D eee x a Dashboard A Filter System Rlabort S Configuration E al Basic Information 3 System Reports Integration a M250 Readers Reported as Offline Name m Create output only if data exists Locations Rules Maps ime A Data Schema Time Type 2 Security Relative Time la Reports Graphs A Manage Reports Reports Schedule Schedule To run a report and view it immediately use the Manage Reports task and chose the report from the list of report definitions Once selected click the Run Report button at the top of the page The report will begin to execute and you can navigate to the Reports task to view its progress and see the results once itis complete Optionally you can click the Run and View Report button to run the report and view the results of it on screen without navigating away from the Manage Reports task 135 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 TeL 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Reports in Asset Manager are created in a tabular style that produces a table output of multiple rows and columns based on the report criteria specified Report Output Reader Noise Report 2013 04 09 12 54 38 S Export XML Start Time 2013 04 01 02 00 00 2013 04 01 02 00 00 2013 04 01 02 00 00 2013 04 01 02 00 00 20
210. ing and configuring the Modbus functionality you can display and or export the mapping For each attribute value to be published by the Modbus Slave Devices Asset Manager will automatically assign a unique Holding Register Address used by Modbus clients to query an attribute s current value The Modbus Slave Addresses panel allows you to view the Modbus Slave Device ID and the value of the Modbus Holding Register ad dress Asset Manager has assigned to each attribute published via Modbus To view and or export the Modbus mapping perform the following steps 1 Inthe Admin Console go to Integration gt Modbus Slave Addresses tab 211 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 2 Click the respective Slave Device in the middle column this example uses Datacenter Temperature to display the registers addresses on the right side of the screen e Asset Manager Administration Modbus Slave Addresses Bj Dartboard one MM Terme Sensa 211 Cond iguratinn Tos Sensor 116 E tategretion Teme Sense 85 T JMX Morster Teme Sensor 137 BACnet Sieve Server Solus 84 BACret Sieve Devicms BACnet Sieve Otyect iC Temp Senso 96 Mastus Sieve Server Terme Sensor 214 f Motus Sima Derizas Teme Sersce 2 f Mosa Sieve Adessias Terme Sanso 178 MD 11D O Di D D em 3 To export this map or mapping click one of the 3 export but
211. ink to and display an asset such as a sensor tag on a map or link to an external URL Map Attributes let you display additional information about the map or part of it these are configured using the Map Attributes Box which you can place anywhere on a map Creating Maps To create a map in Asset Manager perform the following steps 1 Inthe Admin Console navigate to Locations Rules Maps gt Map Configuration 2 From the Location hierarchy in the middle pane select the level on which you want the map to be displayed e g Austin Data Center 3 Click New to create a new map FA Asset Manager Administration Map Configuration ECA E EE E E J Dashboard Filter New Map x o Configuration f E E w Location q tion E ee a Austin Data Center ey Locations Rules Maps 9 Data Center Airflow 4 Data Center RCI RTI amp y Locations amp Rules E Data Center Rack T and H 73 Map Configuration crac 1 ld Map Views crac 2 WA Location to Asset Association Row A 158 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 4 When configuring the map the three required fields are Map Family Name and Map Image Create Map Map Information Map Family Name Default Map View Is Default Map Map Views Allow All Map Views Map Image Select file Hot Spot Display Settings Fill Color Fill
212. ion about all of the assets and the attributes of those assets at any particular location whether the location contains one or many assets A useful function of this association is to use Calculated Attributes to obtain ageregate information about a collection of assets This information can be as simple as a count of all the assets in a location e g all of the servers in a particular data center row or it can be an industry standard metric e g the Rack Cooling Index RCI derived from all of the temperature sensors on all of the racks for a given row of racks or for an entire data center In addition these calculated attributes can be used on maps in reports to generate alerts etc just like any other attribute Defining Summary Assets is done by using the Location to Asset Association sub task under Locations Rules Maps in the Administrator Console Working with Summary Assets A Summary Asset can be used just like a standard Asset It can be defined with any number of attributes just like standard Assets Summary Assets will show up in the Table View as do regular assets The default schema has three types of assets already defined in the system in a hierarchy which represents best practice for defining and structuring Summary Assets within Asset Manager This best practice is based on RF Code expertise and extensive deployment experience At the top level of the hierarchy is the following structure e Inventory Inve
213. ion for temporarily suspending alarms and their Global Alert Policy thresholds so alerts don t occur during a planned outage or other scenario User Console Task and Sub Task Matrix Global Search Multiple search parameters can be entered into the global search field and the results returned in one table parameters are not anded together Dashboard Creation modification and organization of asset Dashboards is accomplished in this section 222 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin IX J0 50 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www stcode com 2FCOD Manage Tags Finding discovering and adding detected tags to the unassigned tag queue then creating assets can be accomplished here Tag Summary Viewing summary counts for all types of tags broken down by Tag Groups being used and detected unused by Asset Manager Asset Templates Asset Templates allow for easy creation of assets by pre populating attributes in template and are managed in this section Views Customizing asset views allow for the specification of different column headings asset attributes to view assets in the asset grid with custom columns pU Manage Assets Table view of all assets being managed by the system filterable using the filter bar along the top of the view Manage Assets By Location Pre defined filter s to view assets by their current location selectable by using the location hier
214. ions Rules Maps Data Schema E Asset Attributes Status Attributes Calculated Asset Attributes de Asset Types Custom Attribute Types Statistical Pack Statistical Policy kit Schema Import Click on the New button Enter a Name In this example it will be called Daily Temp Stat Pack In the Statistics section select the appropriate statistical attributes that were created in the steps above For the Data Window select 1 day i e daily Note that the Data Window should generally match the Update Frequency Select Daily for the Update Frequency Click on the Save Changes button Filter Daily Lemons Daily Moo Stat pack Daily Temp Stat Pack Weekly Temp Stat Pack Basic Information Name Daily Temp Stat Pack Description Source Attribute Temperature statistics Minimum Attribute Daily Minimum Temperature Maximum Attribute Daily Maximum Temperature Average Attribute Daily Average Temperature Median Attribute Daily Median Temperature Standard Deviation Attribute Daily Temperature Std Devi Update Configuration Data Window Days Update Frequency Then select the Statistical Policy task to associate the Statistic Pack with Assets In this example the Assets are Temperature Humidity sensors in a particular location Click the New button Enter a Name In this example it will be called Temperature Stats Policy Austin Filter by Asset Type In this exa
215. is part of the reader configuration is simply a quick test You will need to add all of the Group Codes for all of your tags in the Asset Manager web console Treatment code After adding the Group Code the reader will see all of the tags in range with that Group Code and will begin to report information about the beacons they are transmitting in the far right window pane listing each tag by Tag ID a Reader Tags lt RF Code Tag Groups S Configuration lt pp 7 Tag ID Payload Payload Octal SSI Channel A SSI Channel B Dada S Delete THSRCK00001900 217 331 73 63 E Network Configuration ciis hal Reader Configuration P Users ER Up Connect 5 Time Tag Filter Serial Ports S Diagnostics A Tags L Summary Ml Tools You can see that under the middle column labeled Tag Groups the Group Code of THSRCK is displayed the one that was just added in the example above and tags with that Group Code that the reader sees will begin to appear in the right column For each unique tag the basic attributes of the tag beacons payload and signal strength indicator SSI values ate shown 22 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Tag ID Payload Octal ssl Channel A 551 Channel B F F THSRCK00001900 217 331 63 The signal strength indicator provides a measure of
216. ish to edit from the Asset Type hierarchy tree and the Asset Type editor will display the details of the selected Asset Type 3 Inthe Attributes area of the Asset Type editor select the Asset Attribute you wish to delete and click the Delete button Custom Attribute Types Custom Attribute Types can be organized in a simple flat group or in a hierarchical structure just like standard Asset Types However creating and using Custom Attribute Types requires forethought and planning to fully and correctly implement because it s almost always necessary to create other objects within the schema to use with them e g new Asset Attributes It s also necessary to associate the new Types and Attributes properly to each other as well as to your Assets Therefore configuring Custom Attribute Types is an advanced topic that is not covered in full detail in this manual Most of the structures and relationships within your data schema can be accomplished by using standard Asset Types and Asset Attributes Custom Attribute Types are only required for very specific situations 27 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com H COD Status Attributes Status Attributes are pre defined system attributes that cannot be customized Status attributes are inherited by Assets An Asset may have a tag and open alert or any number of other associations and or dependencies associated with it
217. l Operators These are the various operators that will be used within the formula such as addition subtraction multiplication division parentheses etc Scope This is the field of reference or view of the calculated attribute For example local scope or location scope Time References These are the time specifications that will be used in the Calculated Asset Attribute Example ASSET COST 4225 The formula above produces a result which is 25 of the cost of the asset For more information about the Functions available for use in Asset Manager refer to the Calculations and Functions Matrix in the Appendix 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 79 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com cn hs N I LA RECOD Creating a Calculated Asset Attribute To create a Calculated Asset Attribute perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Data Schema gt Calculated Asset Attributes Asset Manager Administration Calculated Asset Attributes Filter Name and Typ T Asset Count e Configuration ae Calculated Max Alert Severity E Integration e Locations Rules Maps A Data Schema 7 Asset Attributes 7 Status Attributes 7 Calculated Asset Attributes b Asset Types Y 2 Click the New button The Calculated Asset Attributes configuration pane will appear 3 Identify the Calculated Asset Attribute by Name ID Type and Description and then configure it by
218. l for an existing temperature and or humidity tag perform the following steps 1 In User Console click on the Alert Management tab in the left hand column 2 Click on the Thresholds tab 3 Inthe Asset Alert Threshold window choose Humidity Alert Threshold from the drop down menu 116 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 4 Complete the relevant form fields Name Humidity Alert Threshold Threshold Filter Asset Type Sensor would cover all sensor tags First Attribute Value Operator gt or gt are logical choices First Attribute Value 45 or your numerical preference this is the Relative Humidity RH percentage value R Asset Manager Thresholds Search lt RF Code t9 3 B Ascot roti Expected Location Trees B Asset Otfine R LOCATE Oftine Bow Banery Alert Tiwechotd Disables B Message Loss gt 10 B e Abert Treestold Cer iecth b Teper Alert Thresihota Desmisied User Required To Acknowsedge Alert Type Of Alet To Create Security 5 Click the Save Changes button 6 Click Actions 117 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 7 In the Asset Alert Action window select Email Alert Action from the drop down menu Bre tno Actions search C gt RF Code SES SS IE TE CT 118 9229 Waterford Centr
219. l of the abilities of the Asset Reporter Role but also have the ability to view and acknowledge system generated Alerts Asset Editor Asset Editors have all of the abilities of Asset Reporters and also have the ability to add and edit Assets create and edit Dashboards and associate Assets to tags Asset Manager Asset Managers have all of the abilities of Asset Editors and also have the ability to edit the Asset Attributes System Administrator Users with the System Administrator Role have access to all of the functions in both the Administrator Console and the User Console NOTE For more detailed information about the specific Tasks that are enabled or disabled for each Role refer to the User Role Matrix in the Appendix Adding Users The first step to managing Users and setting levels of access for them is to create them To add a User perform the following steps P 2 Access the Admin Console Click Security gt Users Click the New button Q Asset Manager Administration Users I E imo tan Y Lzcatzrm Hen igu i Cata Schone For each User account there are several mandatory fields and others that are optional At a minimum provide each User with a Name which is the username a Password unless you are integrating with Active Directory a Full Name which is a description ot the real name of the user and a Role 1 2 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel
220. lert Severity The default is Warning but you can select any of the other choices that you desire User Required To Acknowledge Alert Again this is up to the user to choose if they want to have to acknowledge alerts 131 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Alert Filter Threshold Filter Asset Type Selecting Asset will include all tags assets Threshold Filter Location lt Leave BLANK to search all locations gt First Attribute Choose Online Status from the drop down menu First Attribute Value Operator Choose the equal sign from the drop down menu First Attribute Value Check the checkbox Second Attribute Choose Asset Tag from the drop down menu Second Attribute Value Operator Choose the equal sign from the drop down menu Second Attribute Value Enter the tag ID of the tag asset you want to watch for examples LOCATE00008398 RCKIRCO00856498 etc Alert Actions NOTE Be sure to add all the Alert Actions that you want in order to make sure you receive the notifications you want to receive For the example the Action Wade Email was used Alert Messages Alert Start Message lt user defined to say whatever you want it to say gt Example An online alert condition has been detected for the asset SaAlertEntity Alert Resolve Message lt user defined to say whatever you want it to say gt Example An online alert
221. leulated Attributes wih UP Ry AASSen EE EEEE herbes om ot id e er ud hd m EEEN c bii te rud 62 aii A eE UN ene eee E o ee Dein E ERU UNE DR RAD ERREUR 63 Bditlno ab ogattob Associated shines a Wat Meet et er eT ete E TT eT ee eT eT tt ee TT 64 Removwne the Associaton or a Location to an AS rara auch aes natch nner amends minne 64 eve AAT TASS pr 66 Ger spart dee eC up Waa LR estate are ner mmr err eer etica re ey ore eee Ts A eee renee E ea ere tren 66 Aute T pes and DC AS tia 69 CLIN TN te tet BBEES CO Mano gt el lo POPE OA O RP REPO OOO Fond ERE O ee O DRESD MO 12 IE ci ne an Asset Abe associated ita a Asset T BB a a a 76 Dekking ane ee DU OH butter so clated SU d ESSE Ty pE eena E Tt Tce tre entre tet ctr tt a Sis vosc arieulaciom Ayes Meme Tete v Stitus ADIOS NN err et ret 78 Bie E SEE AAA E E E d depre eda bd dU cuperet ba rubi aped er een itte ied diu E in Ded eer ere 29 ol Na olor Mv cep RC o M at 19 CHeadne a Caleulited Asset ando DUE MAA Al et emer eT en EIN e oO E rt TT 80 Apple a C alemlated Asser DUE pute TO an assel POr ea 81 Condiional Borrado Yao DU aura Te IPM DINE 85 System INGE CATIONS can IA A A 90 Ovemview odo ccoo lee AA 90 SMA and ste No tica liv DEUM ee ere US ne ee ty 91 ONT IM e PRA PR Pr OE Oo testa ns dul O 91 loj
222. licy iif Schema Import E Phase Voltage L N Port Position Verified Pressure Proximity ID Report Output Report Status Report Type Ay Ay a Sensor Disconnected Ay Service Date Speed SSL Mode Start Time Startup Timestamp Tag Capacity Used Tamper Ay hy A Ul Tamper Armed lt Temperature Total Tags Tower ID Transient 141 A Ul Unassigned Tags Up Connection Enabled Name Daily Maximum Temperature Description Record Value Changes Restrictable Hide On User Console Units Celsius Statistic Maximum Formatting Foreground Color E Add 189 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD Similarly create other statistical attributes for Daily Minimum Temperature Daily Average Temperature Daily Median Temperature and Daily Standard Deviation These new attributes must then be associated with an asset type Go to Administrator console gt Asset Types and choose the appropriate Asset Type In this example you would choose Asset gt Sensor gt Temperature Humidity Then you would click on the Add button to add the newly created attributes Then navigate to Administrator console gt Data Schema gt Statistical Pack and create a Pack Enaka MORT TRES Sn Dashboard S Configuration 5 Integration e Locat
223. ll be used in this example is PURCHASE DATE NOTE This attribute has been previously configured using the Asset Attributes sub task To create a Warranty Expiration Date for the Server Asset Type perform the following steps 1 Enter the required Name and Type information in the Settings Task Pane In this example the information should appear as follows Name One Year Warranty Expiration Date Description The date upon which the one year warranty will expire for an asset Record Value Changes This box should be checked so for example if in the future an extended warranty is purchased and this expiration date changes this occurrence will be recorded to the database ID ONE_YEAR_WARRANTY_EXPIRATION_DATE This is automatically generated from the creation of the name for the calculated attribute Type Time and Date should be selected from the drop down list 2 To build the calculated attribute expression formula click the Function button and from Time Functions select date year month day function 81 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com Fitter Name Description 3 Category Rounding Functions cel value Ceing fcorivatue Fibor round value round value decimal places Round 3 Category Statistical functions avgi abuts man atrybut ran art a Category Tima Functions Date n YYYY oc YYYY MM of YYYY_MALDDO format Day of month gwen
224. location BOTTOM This section allows you to e Choose the size of the Graph e Choose a background color for the Graph defaults to white e Choose the line thickness of the Graph e Group axis values by unit e Display a grid on the Graph e Specify the location of the Graph legend To configure the appearance of a graph perform the following steps 1 Choose whether or not to group the Y axis of the graph by the unit type of the displayed attributes NOTE If this box is not checked and two or more attributes are chosen then each of the attributes will be given its own Y axis For example since the reader noise attribute for channel A on a reader 1s a different attribute than for channel B then two Y axis will be produced each with its own minimum and maximum values and the result may be that the point produced for the value of 80 for Channel A might be at a different place than the point produced for the same value for Channel B Since both of these attributes share the same attribute unit type you can correct this problem by choosing to Group Axis by Unit By doing this only one Y axis will be produced that will represent both of the reader channels and all the points will line up correctly when compared to each other 2 After you choose the graph configuration settings click the Save Changes button at the bottom of the editor screen to save the graph At this point the graph is defined created and ready to run NOTE You can make
225. luid PDU PDU Breaker PDU Feed Line PDU Input Channel PDU Outlet PDU Phase Temperature Humidity Summary Location B Campus gt Building Floor O Zone Room B Country gt State or Province e City B IT Area gt Computing Facility e Data Center IT Room e Wiring Closet gt CRAC Unit gt Rack P Row of Racks The schema contains the following Asset Attributes e Airflow Position e Building Environmental Monitoring e CRAC Airflow Position e CRAC Cooling Capacity e Door Sensor Application 235 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com al e Equipment Power Outlet 1 e Equipment Power Outlet 2 e Equipment Power Outlet 3 e Equipment Power Outlet 4 e IT Environmental Monitoring e Rack Environmental Monitoring e Rack PDU 1 e Rack PDU 2 e Rack Position e Rack Power Capacity e Rack Power Monitoring e Row Environmental Monitoring e Row Power Monitoring e Temperature Sensor Application e Volumetric Air Flow Rate The schema contains the following Calculated Attributes e Any Door Open e lt Any Doors Last Opened e lt Any Fluid Detected e Any Sensor Offline e Average Exhaust Temperature e Average Humidity e Average Intake Temperature e Average Intake Humidity e Average Return Humidity e Average Return Temperature e Average Return Temperature Weighted e Average Temperature e Average Temperature
226. m PRET e z t Expert Configuration APS Locanos Match osx Time 300 seconds d uma ROR 9 Te 3 Serox Detretarn a gt v icon Aron FO Breaker Asset Type PDU Sraaeer S APTLOC Eg Dore Manage Satis y ene POU Outer Asset Type POU Outlet Y TION Avom POU Phase Amet Type PDU Pasa DL rowwe ETA si FT v a POU Feed Line Ansat Type POU Feed Line Aa Aro POU Sensor Asset Type PDU Serai Devices Yo 1 loe 1 Zeist Accuses User Groups For thew Tage Everyone one Integrating with JMX BACnet Modbus and NetBotz The Integration task allows administrators to configure Asset Manager for use with Java Management Extensions J MX BACnet and Modbus standards A separate license key must be purchased from RF Code to access these features There are eight sub tasks available in this task but the sub task options only appear if license keys for them have been purchased and properly installed Asset Manager Administration JMX Monitor Bookmarks A Basic Information A Enabled Network Settings Hostname localhost Port 8686 BACnet Slave Object IDs Modbus Slave Server Modbus Slave Devices Modbus Slave Addresses Integrating with JMX JMX is part of the Oracle Java SE Platform and provides a simple standard way of managing resources such as applications devices and services The JMX specification defines the architecture design patterns AP
227. mands and run them from the Windows SQL Server To backup an RF Code database called daytona which is the default name assigned to the RF Code database when it is installed with the SQL Server Express option in the Asset Manager installation wizard to a file named c sqlback bak issue the following command on a Windows Command cmd prompt on the SQL Server which may or may not be on the same server as the Asset Manager server application NOTE SQL Server Express 2012 is bundled with a version of the SQL Management Studio therefore you can back up and restore SQL databases such as the Asset Manager database using that menu driven utility SQL Express 2008 Syntax c lUserslAdministrator gt sqlcmd E S localhost RFCASSETMGR Q BACKUP DATABASE daytona TO DISK c A1sqlback bak NOTE localhost RECASSETMGR Installed by default by Asset Manager RFCASSETMGR is the Database instance running on the local server i e localhost The actual database name running within the SQL instance is daytona Restoring the Database Restoring the RF Code SQL database is as simple Enter the command given below on the destination SQL server if not the same one In this example the database is called daytona on the local server to which SQL database needs to be restored The WITH REPLACE option over writes the existing daytona database c lUserslAdministrator gt sqlcmd E S localhost RFCASSETMGR
228. matically except for the PDU Sensor Asset Type For this item choose Sensor gt PDU from the dropdown list and click Save Once these steps are completed Asset Manager will connect with the SPM system and create unassigned tags for each PDU The tag ID for the PDU s from SPM utilize a naming convention of SPMCDU concatenated with the 8 digit object ID from Sentry Power Manager for example SPMCDU00000001 If a PDU has an external temperature or humidity sensor additional unassigned tag objects will be created for those sensors as well The tag ID for the PDU sensors from SPM utilize a naming convention of PDU tag ID concatenated with sensorA1 or sensorA2 for example SPMCDU000000001 sensorA1 If the PDU to which an external sensor is attached is daisy chained to a parent PDU then the naming convention will be PDU tag ID concatenated with sensorB1 or sensorB2 to indicate the secondary PDU unit These unassigned tags can be associated to assets on the user console previously described in this section 200 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 2 Asset Manager Administration Tag Groups a OM Pe Ce 1 o 19 ver castor dd o nbi E Contour son 2 bara Nto Warne mu O Datsham Arno EM T ucarme Kaya Brox Group Code SPHCDU ATP Server RS zi Aoc Location Match Confidence Brost 0 T ui a pu
229. me 10 1 9 117 ORF TFAVAIL REQUIRED Password STRICT NOTE If you need to add a new reader or want more information about the other configuration fields available for a reader refer to the Advanced Reader Configuration section If you do add another reader then it will also appear in the middle column NOTE If you have more than one Zone Manager configured you must select the appropriate Zone Manager to which the Reader will be associated and you must ensure that the reader is properly configured in each Zone Manager If you have only a single Local Zone Manager configured then all readers will be associated with that one Local Zone Manager 2 Set the SSL Mode and then click the Save Changes button OFF to turn SSL mode OFF on the reader IFAVAIL to use SSL on the reader if it is available REQUIRED to require the use of SSL STRICT to authenticate the matching hostname NOTE If the SSL Mode is set to STRICT and the hostnames do not match then the reader will not connect NOTE Asset Manager needs to have the third party Root CA Certificate to verify the CA certificate installed on the web servers The Java library that comes with Asset Manager by default includes well known third party Root CA Authorities If the SSL certificate of the target web server is included in Java library this step does not apply In the case where an SSL certificate installed on the target web server is not issued by any authorities in Jav
230. mon uses of Calculated Asset Attributes are To calculate a new Attribute for an Asset from an existing Attribute on the same Asset e g a warranty expiration date calculated as a difference from asset purchase date To calculate one Attribute for an asset from an Attribute that already exists on a different asset e g the average temperature of a group of assets that involves aggregating the total temperature reported by a group of sensor tags To calculate an attribute for an asset from a number of attributes from various assets in a specific location Example Compute the maximum or average temperature for all sensor tags in a location Calculated Asset Attributes Overview Calculated Asset Attributes can be used in Asset Manager in the same way as standard asset and status attributes They can be used with Reports Graphs and Alerts and also can be viewed immediately on screen The following types of calculated asset attributes are supported Boolean Date Floating Point Integer Time and Date String A Calculated Attribute Formula must be created in order to configure a Calculated Asset Attribute The following are components of a Calculated Attribute Formula Functions These are built in functions that are part of the Asset Manager software that are used to compute the calculated fields Attributes These are the system or asset attributes which will be used to calculate the Calculated Asset Attribute Standard Mathematica
231. mple we selected Temperature Humidity Optionally other attributes can be selected to filter the results In this example we chose to filter by location Austin Data Center For the Statistical Pack select the pack that we created in the steps above Daily Temp Stat Pack 190 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Click on the Save Changes button Frai Asset Manager Administration Statistical Policy CH Dashboard l Filter x F T s e Configuration Temperature Stats Policy Austin Name Temperature Stats Policy Austin Basic Information S Integration Description e Locations Rules Maps Policy Filter Filter Asset Type Temperature Humidi ta Data Schema 2 F Asset Attributes ES Status Attributes First Attribute Filter Location Austin Data Center Calculated Asset Attributes 6 Asset Types dip Custom Attribute Types E Statistical Pack Second Attribute Statistical Policy it Schema Import First Attribute Value Second Attribute Value Third Attribute Third Attribute Value Statistical Packs Statistical Packs Daily Temp Stat Pack NOTE Daily calculated ate performed at 12 00am each day Weekly calculations ate performed at 12 00am on Sundays Monthly calculations are performed at 12 00am on the first day of each month All days and times are using the server day time Compu
232. n Asset Type Sample Input Form The purpose of the Sample Input Form is to display the entry form that users will see when they go to add an asset to the system within the User Console The following steps will guide you through viewing an Asset Type Sample Input Form 1 Navigate in the Admin Console to Data Schema gt Asset Type 2 Click the button View Sample Input Form The Sample Input Form will appear Basic Information 0 Name 20 Asset Tag 30 Description 40 Asset Location 50 Purchase Terms 50 Expected Location s 60 Purchase Date 65 Purchase Value 70 Manufacturer 80 Model Computer Details 1000 Processor 1100 RAM Amount 1200 Disk Size 1300 Operating System The Sample Input Form above shows an example of the Asset Type entry window for the selected Asset Type The numbers surrounded by parenthesis to the left of each field name is the Field Order assigned when each field was added to its respective asset type and is displayed here to help with managing the form layout These numbers will not be displayed in the User Console when the input form is presented You have full control over the organization of the fields on the form which will be covered later in this document 3 Click the Close button to close the Sample Input Form window 49 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD D
233. nager system Creating New Triggers To create a new Trigger perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Events gt Triggers The Triggers task pane will appear on the right cp Asset Manager Administration Triggers Dashboard Filter Go Configuration ra 3 i3 E Integration e Locations Rules Maps LA Data Schema 2 Security y Reports Graphs E Events ES Actions ES Triggers dry The Triggers task pane is divided into two sections the list of defined triggers on the left and the Triggers Editor on the right At the top of the task pane are several buttons New Copy Delete New Folder Edit Folder and Delete Folder 2 To create a folder click the New Folder button A dialog box will appear 3 Type ina name for the new folder and then click the Create Folder button New Folder Please enter folder name Austin Triggers Create Folder Cancel To edit a folder click the Edit Folder button To delete a folder click the Delete Folder button 4 Click New button and the Trigger Configuration Pane will appear Configuring Triggers The following Trigger configuration settings are available 102 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Basic Information The following Basic Information fields can be configured e Name Name the trigger and select the Enabled checkbox to enable the trig
234. nal value constraints formatting features etc Refer to the Attribute Types and Descriptions section for more information 4 Click the Save Changes button to save the new Attribute 68 39 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 WWW rfcode com rn fa 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 4 ho RFCOD Attribute Types and Descriptions The following table contains the possible values for Attribute Types and a brief description of each Further considerations are presented diee Asset Reference A reference to a particular asset in the system Custom Type List Reference A list of Custom Type references A reference to a Custom Type Custom Type Reference When an entity contains a Custom Type Attribute it will inherit the attributes from the Custom Type that is selected as the value of the attribute Data Object Any form of data J Examples images PDFs DOC files XLS files etc A single date such as January 31 2008 Enum attributes contain an ordered list of selectable values Refers to the fact that the radix point decimal point or binary point can flo at below Floating Point This means that it can be placed anywhere relative to the significant digits of the number Temperature a Status Attribute is of type Floating Point A single date time accurate to seconds and expressed in GMT NOTE The Asset Manager web console will adjust the value of a timestamp Time and Date value by
235. nally infrared IR locators e Optionally multiple separate instances of Zone Manager The following sections are provided to give you a deeper understanding about RFID technology and use in general as well as technical and operational details about RF Code hardware If you want to begin using the RF Code Asset Manager system you can skip these sections and jump to the Licensing section which is immediately followed by installation instructions for Asset Manager RFID Technology Radio frequency identification RFID technology uses radio waves to identify objects A radio transmitter called a tag is attached to the object to be identified A radio receiver called a reader decodes and reports the tag transmissions within its coverage zone The reader forwards this information over wired or wireless networks Each RF Code tag has its own on board power supply a CR2032 coin cell battery Tags operate with a very low duty cycle every 10 seconds the tag wakes up and broadcasts a very short status message at 433 MHz before it sleeps again The tags are one way transmitters RF Code readers are dual channel receivers tuned to receive signals at 433 MHz They do not use high powered radio or magnetic fields to energize or trigger the tags in any way Typical RFID applications include item tracking inventory control asset management and environmental monitoring A specific example is the tracking of servers and network equipment in the data center
236. nan kere ee po dae E E E E E E E 113 Globalen Polleles dot ett Ae ons and e o irira n E N EA EE E ATTE Ei 114 Howto coloma Spec ne E r rin lin 114 How tease Una Scunl e aic m 114 Howto set Up an OTI JA8Set JXIGEE aE etes ito E aiite hus epa tos Roi etie EO O 121 How toc Boso bccn biol el kiiccw alc EN M NI MN MER 126 Reports and GEA DING terciario rl dilaci n 134 oO a AA e tee rer 134 TRS Cia e E AI A 135 WE a Re DORUS P E ee ee re ee 135 P D a a E E A A A E A E E eU MpUEE 136 Contouring Report Template Tem nis astisen enjanen acacia codicia tai 138 Runas and Miedo Report oecge sh spc one sence iaa aloe tallo spots tous acme yaanaensteapdemotsds acme aqpdtmese as LOB e bap atweseanatcaetenpdeeosedscteeiey deaesemseee 144 GD cauli c id Mee 144 Do LT tS P 145 icio m RH 146 MOSES Orpesa e abbatia a dub buona beri 146 pa 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Oe shave Sr ee elas Template De r a E E E E E A ret A Overt sy ere rer er re ee err 147 Conteutne Orph Template DESTA AS raro oo diaz 148 A Gp 27 dE m 153 oo AA E E E E E E E E E
237. nd then click the Export XML Export CSV Export PDF Export SQLite or Export BIRT CSV button Report Output Reader Description Report 2014 04 23 16 03 55 Exporting Reports In addition to viewing report results inside Asset Manager report results can be exported to PDF XML CSV BIRT CSV or SQLite formats There are two places from which you can export reports In the Reports sub task there is an Export button with a combo field to the right of it Choose the format in the combo field and then click the Export button to export the report When viewing the results of a report in Asset Manager the View Report window has three buttons corresponding to the three format types that are available for export Simply click the button corresponding to your desired format and the report will be exported 144 m om m Y p gm ys or de o rT C y 7x f C p 0 r PD EE ATf m om TaY a Y ae srry pm Y VAYA ir Sra 178 a E 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD When you choose to export a report you will either be prompted to save the report or your browser will open it in a new window tab depending on how your browser is configured d VI _ report versions 1 0 starts 28008 11 19T15 08 06 stop 2008 11 208T115 08 06 gt lt name gt Reader Noise November 20 2008 3 08 04 PM CST lt name gt row set attributes
238. net vendor and RF Code s vendor ID is 406 Integrating with Modbus Very similar to BACnet integration exposing data from Asset Manager via Modbus TCP is done by following the steps below In general Modbus configuration consists of licensing enabling configuring and mapping Modbus features to those in Asset Managet NOTE If you have not already done so contact your RF Code sales representative in order to obtain the license that enables the Modbus integration module To license Modbus within Asset Manager perform the following steps 1 Inthe Admin Console go to Configuration gt License Keys Y Asset Manager Administration License Keys E 3 97 pem Dashboard License Count Expiration Date License Key Type Never BIRT 2013 11 05 ASSET BACNET S Configuration Database License Keys SMTP Server 3 Import Configuration MODBUS N JMX 2 Enter the license key Modbus Slave Server To enable Modbus integration and to set the Port perform the following steps 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 TeL 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 1 Goto Admin Console gt Integration gt Modbus Slave Server and check the Enabled check box e Asset Manager Administration Modbus Slave Server Basic Information Enabled Modbus Slave Server Configuration Port 502 E JMX Monitor TJ JMX Domains 9 BACnet Slave Server BACnet Slave Devices BACnet
239. ng readers to the system as well as defining reader configuration parameters e Location and rule configuration e Tag and reader online offline notifications e Query capabilities such as which tags are in a specific location e Multiple data output formats such as JSON CSV and XML Integration with RF Code s Zone Manager does not require RFID specific or RF Code hardware skills It does require a fair amount of standard software programming skills to configure programmatically the system and utilize the data returned by the system Ideally integration with Zone Manager would tie the system into an existing asset management or monitoring solution RF Code highly recommends attending a training class to learn the details of the RF Code Zone Manager system Contact RF Code support for information on training classes Zone Manager is bundled with Asset Manager and accommodates a single Zone for reader and tag environment coverage However Zone Manager can be installed on one or mote separate servers The system requirements for Zone Manager installations when installed apart from the Asset Manager installation are less stringent as the Zone Manager application requires a smaller footprint and less computing resoutces to function For alternate or expanded configurations please refer to the Zone Manager User Guide and consult with RF Code Support for optimal deployment conditions and configuration Licensing Overview Asset Licenses Asset Manager i
240. nnot be located or you want to enter another IP address Complete any other configuration options you need per your network Click the Apply Settings button Click to go back to the Network tab and then click the Finish button to close the application Reader Configuration with the Reader Web Console To see RF Code tags within range of the reader and to help determine proper placement and functioning of readers and or tags perform the following steps NOTE The Reader Web Console can be useful when troubleshooting reader and tag issues after full deployment when you are in maintenance or sustaining mode 1 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 7 Physically connect your LAN to your RF Code reader Find the unique hostname of the reader which can be found on a white label on the underside of the reader labeled DEFAULT HOST NAME NOTE You should have the IP address of the reader after configuring it with the RCU but you can also ping the hostname of the reader from a Command Prompt to get its IP address Take the hostname of the device and prepend it to the LAN domain to which the reader is connected The URL follows the pattern of DEFAULT HOST NAME LAN Domain The following is an example DEFAULT HOST NAME rfcodeab1cd2 LAN Domain domain com NOTE In the example above the full URL would be http rfcodeablab2 domain com 225 8758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com
241. ntory Assets represent assets that are being tracked and managed e Sensor Sensor Assets represent sensors that are being managed e Summary Location Summary Location assets represent the Summary Assets that are being managed Within the hierarchy under all three of main Asset types including Summary Assets there are also subtypes or subcategories These can also be altered or changed in the Schema Editor if necessary By grouping each of these three types of Assets as peers you can easily configure Table View filters and Reports to use specific categories of Assets For example if you want to view all of your Sensors all it takes is a single click The same is true for all Summary Assets Out of the box Asset Manager contains only a single Summary Asset Summary Location However both of the default asset schemas available for immediate import offer the following hierarchy of summary assets from which you can build your own structures When you create Summary Assets and associate them to a Location be sure to select the appropriate level or point in the hierarchy in order to properly classify the Summary Asset 59 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite v RFCOD Summary Assets and Locations A Location can represent a campus a building a floor a room a sub room as well as rows of a data center and even individual racks in a dat
242. olds instead of with Triggers For Alerts there is an Alert Viewer as well Alerts can be configured by and for both Administrators and Users The first three sub tasks are available in both the Admin Console and the User Console but in the Admin Console there is also a Global Alert Policy sub task Alerts have Actions much like Events do The information available in Alert Actions is much the same as that available in Event Actions Configuring Alert Alerts is also essentially the same as configuring Event Actions although Alerts have Thresholds while Events have Triggers NOTE Email notifications about database connectivity are configured in the Configuration task under the Database sub task Alert Viewer The Alert Viewer is accessible as the first sub task under Alert Management However the information that will be accessible within it will not be present until you have configured one or more Alert Actions based on at least one or more Thresholds LA Asset Manager Administration Alert Viewer gt RF Code eT EM LETS CR Dashboard Type tatu Attribute Operator Vake System Alet w Both v v y Configuration a Alert State Asset Type Alert Severity Alert Start Time Alert Resolve Time Alert Message E Integration ko Locations Rules Maps FB ser A Reports Graphs zzz Events b Alert Management B Alert Viewer Actions Thresholds R Global Alert Policy This sub task lets you view and manage alerts
243. om RFCOD Associating a Location to an Existing Asset To associate a location to an existing asset perform the following steps 1 Click the Associate lt Location gt to Existing Asset option and click the OK button Associate RF Code HQ Austin Data Center Row 1 Rack 2 To x Asset Assodate RF Code HQ Austin Data Center Row 1 Rack 2 To New Asset You will be prompted to choose an asset to associate this location with 2 Select the asset by using the filter bar at the top of the dialog to narrow down the results until you find the asset that you want to associate 3 Click Go to list the available assets 4 Choose an asset from the list and then click the OK button to continue Associate RF Code HO Austin Data Center Row 1 Rack 2 To Selected Asset F Location Status w RF Code HQ Austi w Active Operator Value w Contains Name Description RF Code HO Austin Data Center Row 1 Rack 2 N The location will now appear in the asset list to the right and will also appear in the location tree with the location to asset association icon Editing a Location Associated with an Asset To edit an associated asset perform the following steps 1 Select the location from the list The asset will appear in the right hand task pane 2 Select the asset and click the Edit Associated Asset button The asset information screen will appear 3 Edit the necessary asset details 4 Click OK when you have finished editing
244. on Adaptive Thresholds are set in the User Console gt Alerts gt Thresholds task As an example we will set a threshold that monitors for temperatures that are outside of the weekly average temperature 191 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Click on the New button Select Adaptive Alert Threshold Enter a Name In this example it will be called Weekly Temp outliers in Austin Filter by Asset Type In this example we selected Temperature Humidity Optionally other attributes can be selected to filter the results In this example we chose to filter by location Austin Data Center In the Adaptive Attribute section we choose Temperature for the Adaptive Attribute For the operator we choose gt For the Adaptive Attribute Expression we choose Weekly Temperature Average 10 Weekly Temperature Standard Deviation Click Save Changes Asset Mert Treo Adaptwe Alat Threshold imd EL adapte amp 2 Custom Treeshoce aC pors and Asses s 2o0mnhe mo RET anc 8 JRO and ST A Tero gt 100 LA erat whe Baan Mera Hama Weekly Termo outiers n Acstrl Tremoto Schacule Always ACIve Enabled 4 Aw Seyerty Warmg User Recurec To Acknowlecge Aut Type Of Art To Create Custom Alert Seourty Execution User Account et fet Treason Fiter Asset Type T resrold Fite Locator Tramo
245. on HTTP Post Report Graph Action w Basic Information Name Enabled Report Action Configuration Primary HTTP URL Secondary HTTP URL SSL Do not use SSL HTTP Username HTTP Password PETTITT TET TT Confirm Password AAA AA AAA NOTE Those fields with asterisks are required fields e Name The name of the FTP action e Enabled Check this checkbox to enable the FTP Action e Primary HTTP URL The primary URL of the HTTP server e Secondary HTTP URL A URL to use if Asset Manager fails to connect to the Primary HTTP URL e SSL There are three SSL modes you can select from o Do not use SSL No encryption or verification o SSL No Verification Selecting this option indicates that the HTTPS protocol should be used but errors in the destination host s digital certificate such as expiration untrusted signing authority and host verification should be ignored o SSL Verify Certificate and Hostname Selecting this option requires that the HTTPS protocol be used the communication to and from the host will be encrypted and will require that the digital certificate of the destination host be valid e HTTP Username The user name you need to access the HTTP URL For HTTP Basic Authentication e HTTP Password The password your user needs to access the HTTP URL For HTTP Basic Authentication e Confirm Password The same password as above 15 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 A
246. on an existing one To copy a Threshold perform the following steps 1 Click the Copy button 2 Change or enter any additional settings NOTE By default the Name of a Threshold is Copy of name of alert copied 3 Click the Save Changes button Deleting Alert Thresholds To delete a Threshold select the appropriate Threshold from the tree and then click the Delete button 113 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com m A REF COD Global Alert Policies for Alert Actions and Thresholds This sub task lets you manipulate Alert Actions and Thresholds globally for the entire Asset Manager system There are three Global Alert Policy settings that can be set Active when this setting is chosen all alert actions and thresholds that have been configured in the Asset Manager system will be active and perform as configured Suspend Alert Actions when this setting is selected all alert actions will be suspended until the Active global alert policy is P 8 gt P 8 posue re selected This will suspend all alert actions from being triggered until the setting is returned to Active Suspend Thresholds amp Alert Actions when this setting is selected all configured thresholds and alert actions will be suspended until the Active or if Suspend Alert Actions is set Threshold will be restored globally global alert policy is re selected
247. onfiguration gt SMTP Server 1 Asset Manager Administration SMTP Server Basic Information 3 Database Name SMTP server 1 License Keys x SMTP Server Network Settings 4 Import er om Hostname mail example com Under Basic Information give a Name to the SMTP server configuration 91 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD 3 Complete the Network Settings fields Network Settings Hostname mail exampie com Port 25 Connection Security None SMTP Username None STARTTLS SSL TLS Confirm Password AA SMTP Password From Address Hostname The name of the mail server Port The port of the mail server Connection Security Set a secure connection protocol of STARTTLS SSL TLS or None STARTTLS upgrades an unsecure channel to a secure one so no additional configuration is necessary to send notifications with TLS However if you choose the SSL TLS Connection Security option you will need to ensure your mail server is correctly configured for this communication protocol SMTP Username The username for an account with admin permissions for the SMTP mail server SMTP Password The password for an SMTP server admin account Confirm Password The same as above From Address The email address of the admin for notifications about the SMTP server configuration 4 Click
248. onnect NOTE When getting started you will want to accept most of the default entries If you need to make changes in the future refer to the Advanced Reader Configuration section in the Appendix For example if you will be using multiple Zone Managers then you will not only have to add and configure the others later in Asset Manager but you will also have to select or change the appropriate Zone Manager to which your reader will be associated Initially or if you will only be using a single Local Zone Manager then leave the default option selected for Local Zone Manager NOTE Additional reader configuration options are described in the Advanced Reader Configuration section in the Appendix 33 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin IX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 4 Click the Save Changes button The reader you have just configured will appear in the middle pane to the left for the configuration pane tl Asset Manager Administration Readers e Eee To co x Sn Dashboard SY Configuration 3 Database T License Keys 1 SMTP Server 5 Import Configuration E Export Configuration Tag Groups ig Zone Managers La Zone Manager Status kal Readers Adding Tag Groups Adding a new Treatment Sub Code hereafter referred to as the Tag Group e g 04V lets you add new Group Codes e g THSRCK to the system by doing so you are telling the system how to interpret beacon
249. or click Cancel to exit Removing the Association of a Location to an Asset You can disassociate an asset from a location This will not delete or retire the asset 1t will only remove the association of the asset to the location To actually delete an associated asset you must first perform the disassociation described here 64 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD To disassociate an asset from a location perform the following steps 1 Select the location from the list and click the Remove Asset Association button 2 When prompted confirm that you want to remove the asset association 3 Click the Remove Association button to remove the asset association or click the Don t Remove Association button to exit 65 229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com Fx us RI COD Asset Attributes Asset attributes define fields to hold specific pieces of information about assets Administrators may define as many asset attributes as needed to properly represent the various assets to be tracked and managed Asset Manager supports a variety of different types of attributes There are three main categories of Attributes Asset Attributes Status Attributes and Calculated Asset Attributes The second two types of Attributes are the Status Attribute and the Calculated Asset Attribute
250. ore valid email addresses e Email Subject Line Specify or generate programmatically with macros NOTE The Macro function can be used to populate the Subject line of your email alerts For more information refer to the Macros section in the Appendix 155 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Configuring FTP Actions for Reports and Graphs The following settings are available System Report Graph Action TP Report Graph Action w Basic Information Mame Enabled File Transfer Information Transfer Protocol Remote Directory TYPE S DATE File Mame S NAME _S TIME NOTE Those fields with asterisks are required fields e Name The name of the FTP action e Enabled Check this checkbox to enable the FTP Action e Transfer Protocol Either FTP or SFTP SSH File Transfer e Remote Directory Specify or generate programmatically with macros e File Name Specify or generate programmatically with macros NOTE The Macro function can be used to populate the Subject line of your email alerts For more information refer to the Macros section in the Appendix 156 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Configuring HTTP Post Actions for Reports and Graphs The following settings are available System Report Graph Acti
251. ou want to use when publishing the Modbus Device Sensor Attributes 210 A Sar rAr NA RRG Y O rQ mi mra ala avy 747 AAT DIAN iva wa wisi ununi m Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD NOTE The Asset Filter is used to define the criteria for selecting which assets and their corresponding attributes will be published by the Modbus server and therefore made available to Modbus clients The available filters are Asset Type Location and then the First and or Second Attribute Attribute Value Operator and Attribute Value Asset Filter For Publishing Modbus Device Sensor Attributes Filter Asset Type Temperature Humidity Filter Location Austin Data Center First Attribute First Attribute Value Operator First Attribute Value Second Attribute Second Attribute Value Operator Second Attribute Value NOTE The Filter Asset Type is the top level type of the asset on which you want to filter NOTE Filtering in general is used to limit or reduce the amount of sensors assets being monitored so the more focused the less data In general for environmental type sensors e g Temp Humidity Environmental Sensor can be used NOTE The Location for which this selection is made is determined in the Filter Location section Again the more specific the location the more restricted the data becomes Modbus Slave Addresses After licensing enabl
252. oups s ia fone Managers ity fone Manager Status jal Readers dal Reader Firmware a Reader Status y GPS RE Serial Devices Location Behavior 1 Server Here you can configure the Update Assets to Unknown Location field Location Behavior Update Assets to Unknown Location K Asset is offline or no matching location rules You can have Asset Manager display an Unknown Location value for Location based on three possible conditions e Never to maintain the assigned location even if the asset is offline or its location cannot be determined based on location rules e No matching location rules to display Unknown Location when an asset s location cannot be determined by any location rules in the system e 6 Asset is offline or no matching location rules to display Unknown Location when the asset goes offline or when an asset s location cannot be determined by any location rules in the system NOTE For greater precision in locating and determining the location of assets RF Code provides IR location hardware with line of sight 8 p 8 8 p 8 precision in order to add a further layer or measure of confidence when determining the location of an asset Locations and Rules Assigning various rules to locations can help to fine tune the interpretation of tag location through the specification of reader channel SSI thresholds or through the use of IR Codes 1f you use IR tags and Room Locators or Rack Locatots To ad
253. p get or snmp walk e Transport Protocol Select UDP or TCP e Hostname The hostname e Port By default 162 e Type of Notification Select TRAP or INFORM e Authentication User ID Password Confirm Enter the user ID and password for your server and confirm it e Authentication Protocol Select None SHA 1 or MD5 by default this is set to SHA 1 Additional Event Information Additional Attributes Name Asset Location Description Advanced Engine ID Context Engine ID Context Name Encryption Protocol Encryption Password rr Confirm Password ITITITIIIIITITTTO e Additional Attributes Select the additional attributes you would like to publish for the event e Engine ID Within an administrative domain an SNMP Engine ID is the unique and unambiguous identifier of an SNMP engine Since there is a one to one association between SNMP engines and SNMP entities it also uniquely and unambiguously identifies the SNMP entity Enter the SNMP Engine ID if applicable 100 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD e Context Engine ID Within an administrative domain a contextEngineID uniquely identifies an SNMP entity that may realize an instance of a context with a particular contextName Enter the SNMP Context Engine ID if applicable e Context Name A contextName is used to name a context Each contextName MUST be
254. pane are several buttons New Copy Delete New Folder Edit Folder and Delete Folder System Event Action o Configuration E Integration wy Locations Rules Maps LA Data Schema 22 Security l Reports Graphs E Events E Actions E Triggers 93 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 2 To create a folder click the New Folder button A dialog box will appear New Folder x Please enter folder name Email Actions 3 Type ina name and click the Create Folder button The new folder will appeat in the folder hierarchy Filter 3 Austin 7 Email Actions The menu above the folder hierarchy contains buttons that let you manage your folders and the Actions categorized within them To edit the folder click the Edit Folder button To delete a folder click the Delete Folder button and the folder will disappear from the data tree 4 Click the New button or select a pre existing action to edit fF Event Action Email RF Logging Event Action 94 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 5 Choose an action from the drop down list HTTP Post Event Action SNMP V1 Trap Event Action SNMP V3 Event Action Configuring Event Actions In both the Admin Console and the User Console you can create and configure any of the followin
255. parents After planning perform the following steps in the following order 1 Use the Asset Type task to create all of your Asset Types organized in your desired hierarchy Use the Asset Attribute task to create all of your Asset Attributes Use the Asset Type task to associate the Asset Attributes with the appropriate Asset Types Validate that Asset Type input forms are correct by viewing the Sample Input Form for each Asset Type From the Asset Types task menu you can perform all of the following primary functions The New Asset Type button for creating new Asset Types The Delete Asset Type button for deleting Asset Types The View Sample Input Form button for viewing a sample of the Asset Type s input form The Expand All icon button just beneath the New Asset Type This button expands the entire Asset Type hierarchy The Collapse All icon button just beneath the New Asset Type This button collapses the entire Asset Type hierarchy 45 p 47 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Viewing Asset Types To view and or configure Asset Types perform the following steps 1 Inthe Admin Console navigate to Data Schema gt Asset Types a Asset Manager Administration Asset Types O DT OET S Dashboard S Configuration 2 Integration ey Locations Rules Maps A Data Schema T Asset Attributes F Status Attrib
256. per point per rack per row and even at a data center bases RF Code also introduces live and historical temperature delta information for hot and cold sides of racks 234 Aor Y rtare A om v rj Os sate aT A et Ww Q r 1 E E Lela 90s s 4 47 7 mtm VAYA prd rmm ume ns 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD rows and cold hot aisle containment setups While sensor points are monitored individually as more sensors ate added key summarized stats simply become mote accurate instead of simply more numerous RCI Rack Temperature Index and RTI Return Temperature Index which are used in determining compliance with data center thermal guidelines are incorporated in this schema This schema is designed to handle the following RF Code environmental monitoring sensor tags e Temperature sensor tags e Humidity and Temperature sensor tags e Fluid sensor tags e Door sensor tags e Dry Contact sensor tags e PDU sensor tags e Differential air pressure tags NOTE For RF Code Asset Manager Usets all information included in this schema is already included in the V4 1 IT Comprehensive Schema This schema is targeted towards deployment of the RF Code sensor solution indoors and more specifically IT type locations The schema Asset Types are organized as follows Asset Inventory Sensor Differential Pressure Door Dry Contact F
257. perature Default Value Attributes The Attributes parameter allows the administrator to determine which attributes to publish via Modbus Attributes are categorized as one of two different types 209 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD 5 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Numeric Float Integer and Enum published using two 16 bit registers Boolean Boolean published using one 16 bit register NOTE The attribute values reported by a Modbus Slave Device are published using the Holding Registers 40000 49999 which are 5 digit addresses NOTE To determine data type of an Attribute go to Data Schema gt Asset Attributes Status Attributes or Calculated Asset Attributes Attribute Defaults Attribute Defaults is an optional setting that allows the administrator to specify a value a Modbus Slave will report if it does not currently have a value for an attribute For example if an administrator has decided to publish the asset temperature value for a collection of assets one or more of those assets could be offline and not have a current temperature value to report In this case a default value well out of the range of legitimate temperature values could be returned so a Modbus client can use this value as an indicator that the current value is not available and therefore unreliable When a Modbus client requests a value for an attribut
258. ple a Server Entity Type may have the attribute RAM In this case different servers have different amounts of RAM therefore the RAM attribute should be non static Deletable Describes whether or not a user can delete this attribute class Attribute Class objects defined by the Asset Manager and not a user are marked as non deletable Value For static attributes this defines the value of the attribute For non static attributes this defines a default value When a user creates an Entity the non static attribute is populated with the default value which the user may change Sort Priority Defines the sort order for attributes on the Entity user interface UT Attributes with a lower sort priority are displayed first Attributes with the same category are shown on the Entity Ul grouped together within a titled box Category has a lower precedence than sort priority as a result attributes with the same category may appear in two different titled boxes For example suppose an entity type contains attributes city with sort priority 100 and state with sort priority 300 both in the location category and a third attribute host with sort priority 200 and category network In this example the UI will have three titled boxes location network and location 261 229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD
259. prepare the system and then quickly begin to start managing it effectively One schema is tailored for environmental monitoring with the use of RF Code sensor tags The other is a more robust schema that includes everything in the first but also adds a host of other asset types and attributes for a much more powerful and mature application of active RFID tags and readers The two Default Asset Schemas available immediately for import are V4 1_Sensor_Tags_Only_Schema and V4 1_IT_Comprehensive_Schema The first is designed with environmental monitoring in mind and contains asset types and attributes suited to monitoring temperature humidity air pressure power etc in your deployment environment The second contains all of the asset types and attributes in the first but it also contains common Inventory asset types and attributes suitable for managing the assets in data centers hospitals industrial deployment environments offices etc To load either default asset schema click the Load Schema button Default Asset Schemas V4 1 Sensor Tags Only Schema V4 1 IT Comprehensive Schema A Schema Descripbon W a Load Schema Custom Schema Schema File NOTE In order to view a description of and a detailed list of the specific asset types attributes etc contained within either schema click to highlight the schema and then click the Schema Description button The same information from each description is presented below but it can
260. presentation or guarantee regarding the suitability of its products for any particular purpose nor does RF Code assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product and specifically disclaims any and all lability including without limitation consequential or incidental damages The user of this system is cautioned that any changes or modifications to this system not expressly approved by RF Code Inc could void the warranty Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information However RF Code assumes no responsibility for its use or for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which would result RE Code Inc 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Building 500 Austin TX 78758 www tfcode com 8 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Overview Asset Manager is an enterprise class software application It is a highly scalable asset tracking and asset management software solution that is tightly integrated with RF Code s Real Time Locating System RTLS readers and asset tags It is also an advanced environmental monitoring software solution that is tightly integrated with RF Code s line of wire free environmental sensors Asset Manager combines powerful yet easy to use tools for configuring locations and asset hierarchies creating comprehensive views of how critical assets are deployed across d
261. r Diagnostics Legacy Tags gage Summary i Tock HESIN CERTIFICATE MI TOU CO AtugAwisAc I JM Ea bGspcaUMMeGCSgeSIb3DQEBBQUAMEIXCTAJBENV BAYTAIVTMQSNCQVDVQOIDAJUNDEPMABGA IUE Bw GQX V C 1 uMPUWEWYDVOQDD AX ZmNVZGVKYi kY3vwh CNNT AI TE TRI Ew JUS CC AM TE IE USH TE CMQ S CQYDVOQGEXVUZELMAKGA1UECANCVF gXOz ANBgNVE ACMBET 1 C3 RTbTEVMENGATUE GuwMCRZSb2317651XT7CI2MICfMABGCSQGSIb3DQESSQUAA4GNADCE10KBEQC acQE z psKogguMOcelr4ligyQUiXvTirlzrk SRl3UBrses A3RCSISSIBerYyDXbtasONRC zRlh GC2BlugsAa7 sanSbresrawKrPXJKwu fggWN3TETZ2VYa7iFwubrXe3poTMpEps losrgXx3fsernf9cecxrnAmVsXIPSfelgBCCSCEQIDAQABO1AwT ACBgNVHQOSEF SU 13 4jKSEXCUOWCH2SCXICs ITRADER CAU 313 K SEX CUOWCN2 S0XT 2 Openthe PEM file and copy the portion of the SSL certificate in the PEM from BEGIN CERTIFICATE to END CERTIFICATE and then paste it into the SSL Certificate field in the Advanced area 3 Copy the private key and paste it to SSL Private Key field 4 Click the Save Changes button for the signed SSL certificate to take effect NOTE If the SSL Certificate and the SSL Private Key do not match the signed SSL certificate configuration will not be successful If the SSL certificate configuration fails for whatever reason then the default self signed certificate for the reader will be applied TIP Ifthe reader setup process fails and you cannot access the reader then you can reset the reader back to its factory defaults For more information refe
262. r to the following article http support rfcode com customer portal articles 746969 After configuring the reader in the web console you must also configure Asset Manager or the Zone Manager for the specific reader so they will accept the SSL configuration that you just enabled 250 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Configuring Asset Manager to Accept SSL Configurations After configuring SSL for a reader with the reader web console perform the following steps in Asset Manager 1 Inthe Admin Console navigate to Configuration gt Readers The Reader configuration screen will appear In the center column is the tree of installed readers and in the right column are the fields you can configure for any reader you highlight in the center column Ll Asset Manager Administration Readers Bookmarks w j Copy S Delete f New Folder x Cu Dashboard E Filter S Configuration E fal Basic Information 3 Database ded rfcodedb 1db6 Name rfcodedb1db6 Reader T License Keys 1 SMTP Server je Import Configuration Export Configuration Enabled 2 Tag Groups Mg zone Managers Ey Zone Manager Status Lal Readers Port 6500 del Reader Firmware SSL Mode IFAVAI La Reader Status yE GPS Authentication amp Serial Devices User ID I server Zone Manager Local Zone Manager Description Network Settings Hostna
263. ration panel is used to specify the network settings to allow BACnet clients to query attribute values published via the BACnet IP protocol To configure Asset Manager to publish attribute values via BACnet you will need to install a BACnet license key on the License Key configuration panel using the Configuration gt License Key sub task Once a BACnet license key is installed the server should be restarted After the server has restarted you will be able to configure BACnet settings The BACnet Slave Server panel is used to configure the parameters BACnet clients will use to connect to Asset Manager s BACnet server 1 Navigate to Integration gt BACnet Slave Server Control Enabled Y BACnet Slave Server Configuration Z JMX Domains BACnet Stave Server t BACNO Stave Dences BACnet Stave Object IDs f Modbus Stave Server E Modbus Steve Devices 5 Modbus Stove Addresses 2 Check the Enabled checkbox 3 Assign a Port NOTE The Port attribute allows the administrator to configure the UDP port on which the Asset Manager BACnet server 1s listening for BACnet client requests The default value is 47808 which is the default UDP port for BACnet UDP Enter the Port number of the BACnet slave server 4 Assign a BACnet Device ID NOTE The BACnet Device ID allows the administrator to configure the unique ID used by the BACnet protocol to identify a device The device ID should not duplicate any other BACnet device ID used in
264. rator defined objects that auto apply filters to views which are available in the Assets pane In contrast Asset Manager bookmarks which are similar in function are uset specific in scope Asset Links can be made available to all users so can be thought of as administrator controlled global bookmarks Users may have multiple Asset Links associated to them Asset Manager will merge and organize those links for concise presentation in the User Console Asset Links are defined and managed in the Admin Console under the User Access gt Asset Links task pane By default there are three Asset Links which in previous versions of Asset Manager were not able to be modified or deleted Defining new Asset Links is done by selecting the New button Fail Asset Manager Administration Asset Links z Re Iz foe A o Tr T En ssskesied Ea NN tl z Basic Information S Configuration E E El Name New IBM Server Asset Link p Manage Assets inle Integration so Lock Link E di Manage Assets By Location w Locations Rules Maps di Manage Assets By Type Navigation Tree Navigate By ao n ES Data Schema Ea s Navigation Root x vw 2 User Access iem Eng Asset Link Filter a Users Link Type 1i Groups di Asset Links Link Location Xv IR LDAP Server Link Attribute PI A By User Audit Trail gt Link Attribute Value Asset Link View s Link View s The Asset Link
265. re Events do not generate a historical event NOTE An essential prerequisite to using Email for notifications of any Event or Alert is to configure SMTP which is described in the Configuring SMTP section The Global Alert Policy task which affect can only be configured in the Admin Console allow an administrator to suspend Alert Alerts or both Thresholds amp Alert Actions 90 8758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 229 Waterford Cent T CJ re RFECOD SMTP and System Notifications Asset Manager sends notifications from the system about assets environmental conditions events etc as well as notifications about the status Of various system components e g reader states Zone Manager states using an SMTP server The SMTP server configuration settings are simple but provide for several mail transfer security options as described in the Configuring SMTP section below 8 P P ty op guring When Asset Manager issues an SMTP send and the message delivery fails it aggressively retries the SMTP send to deliver the message in the following way 1 First Attempt Wait 1 second 2 Second Attempt Wait 15 seconds 3 Third Attempt Wait 30 seconds 4 Fourth Attempt Abort Configuring SMTP In order to send email notifications you must configure SMTP settings for Asset Manager To configure an SMTP Server perform the following steps L 2 From the Admin Console go to C
266. readers e Zone Managers status information about RF Code Zone Manager systems e Summary Assets summarized sensor information for groups of sensors If you import and use the default asset schema then Asset Manager will be fully configured after the schema import and you can begin publishing information from Asset Manager to an external software agent If you will be using a different Schema than the default then you need to set up a custom JMX Domain To set up a custom JMX Domain perform the following steps 1 Go to Integration gt JMX Domains 3 Asset Manager Administration JMX Domains D Delete Sa Dashboard o Configuration E Integration 23 JMX Monitor C JMX Domains Pher BACnet Slave 2 Click the New button 3 Complete the JMX Domain configuration settings NOTE The configuration options are explained below Only the two fields with the symbol Name and Filter Asset Type require a value 4 Click the Save Changes button The custom JMX Domain that you have just created will appear in the list to the left 203 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD JMX Domain Configuration Settings The following configuration settings are available when configuring JMX Domains Basic Information Name JMX Domain Filter Filter Asset Type Filter Location First Attribute First Attribute Value Operator First Att
267. rectives can be modified and added by hand that will change the behavior of the software NOTE Do not edit the system properties file without first contacting RF Code Support It may be beneficial to have this file included in the regular backup regimen of the system All other unique information for Asset Manager other than what is contained in this file is stored in the database As a result if the system where Asset Manager resides is lost the database backup is all that is needed to restore the system NOTE It is very important that database backups are performed on a regular basis For more information about backing up and restoring the database refer to the Backup and Restore section in the Appendix 20 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Linux Installation Instructions Overview In simplest terms perform the following steps Log in to Linux as root Download the rpm Install the Asset Manager package rpm 1 rfcode assetmanager version x86_64 rpm Open ports in the firewall iptables CI INPUT p tcp dport Port ACCEPT oe I ES Files Required The Asset Manager install for the supported Linux platforms consists of two rpm files that are only compatible with 64 bit distributions of Linux These rpm files are e rfcode am zonemanager version x86_64 rpm e rfcode assetmanager version x86_64 rpm The Zone Manager RPM
268. ribute This button will bring up a list of all attributes that have been created or loaded within your Asset Manager e Function This button will bring up a list of all the calculated attribute functions available for use in Asset Manager See table above in Calculated Asset Attributes Overview for a complete list e Asset Attribute This button is used to select an attribute that is associated to a specific asset for use in the creation of an expression When this button is clicked upon it will bring up a list of assets that you have already entered into the system You will select the asset click OK and the list of attributes will display Select the attribute that you would like to be part of the expression and click the OK button The particular asset ID with the attribute will appear in the attribute expression box Le A_d64ebe78 ANY_DOOR_OPEN e Time This button is used to select a specific time to use in the creation of the expression When the button is clicked select one of the time choices and click OK Applying a Calculated Asset Attribute to an Asset Type In the following example a calculated asset attribute will be applied to an asset type The calculated attribute expression is a Warranty Expiration Date for the Server Asset Type The formula used in this example is date year PURCHASE DATE 1 month PURCHASE DATE day PURCHASE DATE The functions that will be used are date year month day The attribute that wi
269. ribute Value Second Attribute Second Attribute Value Operator Second Attribute Value JMX Domain Attributes Attributes Basic Information e Name Create a name for the JMX Domain JMX Domain Filter e Filter Asset Type The JMX Domain filter is used to specify a set of assets The assets which match this filter are used to publish attribute values via JMX Choose the asset type that you would like to use for the JMX Domain e Filter Location Choose a location e First Attribute Choose an attribute that you would like to filter by e First Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected e First Attribute Value Input the value that the first attribute should have for the filter e Second Attribute Choose a second attribute you would like to filter by e Second Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected e Second Attribute Value Input the value that the second attribute should have for the filter JMX Domain Attributes e Attributes Select the attributes from your schema that you would like to publish using JMX Integrating with BACnet To integrate with BACnet configure the BACnet Slave Server BACnet Slave Devices and BAC Slave Object IDs sub tasks 204 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD BACnet Slave Server The BACnet Slave Server configu
270. ribute from the source of the event eg SOURCE COLOR ID of the source which triggered the event The actual value from the source of the event for the first trigger attribute The actual value from the source of the event for the second trigger attribute The actual value from the source of the event for the third trigger attribute The current time 24 hour hour minute second The current time The current offset from GME positive negative digit plus 4 digits The first event trigger filter attribute ID The first event trigger filter attribute Name The second event trigger filter attribute ID The second event trigger filter attribute Name The third event trigger filter attribute 1D The third event trigger filter attribute Name The ID of the trigger that triggered the event The first event trigger filter attribute operator The second event trigger filter attribute operator The third event trigger filter attribute operator The type of the trigger that triggered the event The first event trigger filter attribute value The second event trigger filter attribute value The third event trigger filter attribute value The current year 245 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD Below is a table of the macros available for use with Alert Email Actions Select Macro Macro DATE Ls DAY DESCRIPTION FILTER_LOC
271. rigger to initiate the configured actions when the attribute state updates e Trigger When Exiting Filter Select this checkbox if you would the trigger to initiate the action when the attribute exits the state specified by the trigger configuration e Event Trigger Delay Enter a value here if you would like to delay the trigger by a nominal amount after the state specified has been achieved e Event Actions Select the action s that you would like the trigger to initiate The available actions are configured in the Actions sub task For more about Event Actions refer to the Configuring Event Actions section Click the Save Changes button to save the settings Copying Event Triggers To copy an event trigger perform the following steps 1 Click the Copy button By default the Name of the trigger is Copy of lt name of event copied gt 2 Change or enter any additional settings you want 3 Click the Save Changes button to save the changes Deleting Event Triggers To delete a trigger select the appropriate trigger from the tree and then click the Delete button 104 m om m Y p gm ys or de o rT C y 7x f C p 0 r PD EE ATf m om TaY a Y ae srry pm Y VAYA iY Sri 178 a E 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com H COD Z Alerts Alerts are similar to Events but have to be configured separately with Thresh
272. s Allowed Location And Custom Types Attributes Allowed Restrictable Attributes All Restrictable Attributes Allowed Restrictable Attributes 3 Complete the Group configuration fields e Name The name of the new Group e Description The description of the Group 1 5 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD e Asset And User Console Object Access This checkbox determines if the Group has visibility to all assets If the check box is selected the User can see all assets regardless of Group membership If the checkbox is NOT checked the User can only access assets that have the Group name associated with these assets e Everyone Group Access Specifies whether or not the User can create assets that everyone can access e Allowed Locations And Custom Types Access Determines if the Users can see all Locations and Custom Types or only selected Locations and Custom Types e Allowed Restrictable Attributes Determines if the User can see all attributes of an asset or not If the User is not granted access to all attributes then the User can see all non restricted attributes and only the restricted attributes that are granted to this User All other restricted attributes are hidden 4 Click the Save Changes button The new Group will now appear in the left column Any User assigned to this Group will be allowed access
273. s Value e Value Vv 142 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD This same Filter configuration example could be used for Zone Manager such that report rows would only be produced for Zone Manager attribute changes that happen while the online status has a value 1 e to create a report showing only the status of a reader or Zone Manager when that reader or Zone Manager is online Report Post Conditions If the example above Online Status Has Value was used in the post condition section of the report then report rows would be produced for all attribute value changes for any Zone Manager that had a value for online status at least once during the reporting period In other words the report may produce rows for attribute changes that happen when the online status did not have a value but ONLY if at least one row of data in the report for that Zone Manager had an online status value Report Exception Conditions Exception Attributes Exception Attributes are a list of attributes that are evaluated for report data changes For instance if a reader went through several state changes during the configured report period then each of those changes will become a row in the report only if Reader State is selected as an exception condition or if no exception conditions are specified AND Reader State is included in the column attributes If that same r
274. s a reader s channel A and B into a single channel by evaluating the raw samples and reporting the strongest single sample stream e Merge Reader Channels Checkbox Enables a reader s channel A and B to be merged into a single channel by combining the raw samples into an average single sample stream e Fault In Mask These is the first tag payload filter and limiting function that is set in octal values e Fault In Value These is the second tag payload filter and limiting function that is set in octal values e Change Ignore Mask These is the third tag payload filter and limiting function that is set in octal values Reader Partitioning Reader Partition Count Reader Partition Index Reader Partition Rotation Time T seconds Diagnostics Noise Threshold Tag Event Rate Threshold serial Port Serial Driver bridge Reader Partitioning e Reader Partition Count This indicates the number of portions the tag ID range will be divided into The value must be from 1 to 32 and must be greater than the Reader Partition Index The default is 1 e Reader Partition Index This indicates which portion of the range of tag IDs the reader will observe specifically what the remainder must be when the tag ID is divided by the Reader Partition Count The value must be from O to 31 and must be less than the Reader Partition Count The default is O e Reader Partition Rotation Time This specifies the amount of time th
275. s become more accurate Also included in this schema are Rack Cooling Index RTT and Return Temperature Index RTT Calculated Assets which are used to determine compliance with data center thermal guidelines This schema is also designed to handle all of the data provided by all models of RF Code environmental monitoring sensor tags including e Temperature sensor tags e Humidity and Temperature sensor tags e Fluid sensor tags e Door sensor tags e Dry Contact sensor tags e PDU sensor tags e Differential air pressure tags The schema contains the following Asset Types in the following Asset Type Hierarchy Asset Inventory B IT Equipment gt Computer Desktop Laptop Server Tablet Monitor CRT Monitor LCD Monitor LED Monitor Plasma Monitor Network Equipment Firewall Router Switch VPN Other IT Equipment Backup Storage UPS System Printer Networked Printer Peripheral Printer B Office Equipment gt Copier gt Projector B Other Equipment B Person gt Employee gt Visitor 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite f pa ENS Org Ab ma Ta gt 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 7 gt CE 238 OO Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD B Vehicle Car gt Forklift gt Trailer gt Truck gt Van WN O D o O FS Differential Pressure Door Dry Contact Fluid PDU PDU Breaker PDU Feed Line PDU Input Channel P
276. s from your tag population Group Codes need to be configured in the system for each type of tag that you have After this you can then see what your readers see which are all of the individual tags sending beacons to and being received by the readers configured in Asset Manager Then after identifying the active tag population you can associate the individual tags with your assets and or identify them as sensor tags and assign them to the locations where they will be monitoring environmental conditions To add a new Tag Group follow the steps below 1 Inthe Admin Console go to Configuration gt Tag Groups a Asset Manager Administration Tag Groups Sy Configuration Database T License Keys 3 SMTP Server amp Import Configuration E Export Configuration 34 Tag Groups ih Zone Manag 34 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD 2 3 4 In the right window pane click the Tag Group drop down menu and find the correct Treatment Code for the Tag Group that you want to add NOTE The Treatment Code is printed on each tag on the bottom right corner of the label When you enter a Treatment Code the Group Code will pre populate with a common Group Code however this may not match the Group Code on your tag If it does not enter the Group Code on your tag instead Refer to the sections on Tag Codes in the Appendix and or
277. s licensed based on the number of assets configured in the system The types of assets defined are irrelevant as any asset counts and consumes a license An asset can be an inventory type asset with or without an asset tag associated with it a sensor asset sensor tag or a summary asset Note that an asset is not the same as a tag An asset can be created without a tag associated to it and this will still consume a license All the assets defined in the system consume licenses however no other configured object in the system consumes a license For example none of the following items consume licenses e Readers e Zone Managers local or remote e Users Managers or Administrators e Locations or Rules e Tag Groups or Unassigned tags e Maps e Dashboards For Asset Manager the licensing mechanism is based purely on the number of Assets defined in the system Any asset added to the system will consume a license regardless of the schema configuration Again this means that every Inventory Sensor and Summary Asset will each consume a license The licensing facility works independent of the schema definitions of asset categories all Assets are of equal value and count equally as a licensed entity The number of Locations Users Readers etc defined in the system has no bearing on the licensing 14 8758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX Pu f
278. schema is the collection of Asset Types Asset Attributes Calculated Attributes and Custom Attribute Types Upon initial installation i e out of the box Asset Manager has only a limited number of these available for you to use when adding assets to the system However there are two stock schemas available for immediate import and use in order to give you more pre defined choices for categorizing and working with you assets and sensors These two default asset schemas and all of the assets and asset attributes are discussed in detailed in the Default Asset Schemas section in the Appendix Prior to importing one of the default asset schemas or creating any new Asset Types the Asset Type Hierarchy will appear with limited choices therefore you will need to import a schema or manually create the specific Asset Types that you need for your production environment prior to adding new Assets The base schema immediately available after installing Asset Manager contains no specific Inventory assets such as Server Storage Device Laptop etc It contains three top level categories Inventory Sensor and or Summary Location and eleven second level or sub type Asset Types that represent the standard types of RF Code sensors 3 d Asset di Inventory 3 di Sensor di Differential Pressure 96 Door di Dry Contact o6 Fluid db pou o6 PDU Breaker di PDU Feed Line 6 PDU Input Channe di PDU Outlet di PDU Phase di Temperature Humidit
279. set attribute and then click the Save Changes button NOTE After an attribute is created the following three fields that cannot be edited Values Are Unique ID and Type NOTE Please note that if you want to use the Values Are Unique option for an Attribute the check box must be checked at the time the Asset Attribute is created The restrictions can be removed at any time however you cannot place this restriction on the attribute after it has been created NOTE These fields will appear but will be grayed out If any of these three fields need to be changed the asset attribute must be deleted and recreated Also notice that new field or prompt is displayed once an asset is created which is Retired You should Retire an asset attribute that is used by Asset Types when you no longer desire that the asset attribute be used To do this remove this attribute from the list of attributes used by Asset Types When the attribute is removed all asset types that use the asset attribute will no longer prompt the user for this particular asset attribute However existing assets that do have values for this particular asset attribute will continue to reside in the database and be usable in reports NOTE If there are no Asset Types using the asset attribute and it is no longer needed then the best course of action might be to Delete the asset attribute Deleting Asset Attributes O 8758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 ww
280. set tags managed by the system are defined Control Panel for Zone Managers including adding configuring removing enabling and disabling A view only screen showing current status of the Zone Managers currently being managed by Asset Manager Control Panel for the Readers managed by Asset Manager Adding removing configuring enabling and disabling Readers is handled here This section provides a current view in to the firmware of the Readers a way to upload new firmware to the Asset Manager which can then be installed to the Readers either in mass or individually AMA Nara bea rad Li 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suit 500 Austin A N XJ 219 O Al rae Tat 8 A 0074 78 APTA ern puppes 58 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD A view only screen dedicated to the status and characteristics Reader Status of the currently managed Readers For deployments using GPS receivers attached to Readers this section allows for GPS filters to change the granularity GPS and level of detail at which GPS data will be reported Also a screen to view current GPS status of all Readers and their respective GPS recetvets This screen is very simply a listing of all attached via USB to Serial Devices Readers serial devices and a group access designation which is not necessary but can be configured This screen allows for the following Configuration Options e Units
281. sh board is a fully customizable feature that can allow you to graphically track assets and system status attributes in real time By default a System Status dashboard is configured Overview of Dashboards Multiple dashboards can be configured using graphical widgets to represent attribute values that can be monitored with the dashboard function Several versions of dashboards can be created saved copied and deleted to utilize any of a number of widget selections A table of widgets and their descriptions follows to help in your creation of dashboards Widget Pane This widget pane lists all users that are logged into to your Asset Manager system Users are grouped by role Administrator Manager Editor Reporter Reporter with Alerts amp Events Viewer The list of users can be collapsed or expanded as needed Included in default dash board Users Online This widget pane lists the minimal required configuration tasks and indicates the configuration System Configuration status of the task The configuration task for each of the tasks can be accessed by double clicking on the various task lines Included in default dashboard This widget pane displays a summary of Zone Managers that have been configured for use in the Asset Manager system It lists the number of Zone Managers and indicates their status Offline Zone Macs whether they are online or offline An administrator can access the Zone Manager Status anagers Config
282. shold Disabled B Low Battery Alert Threshold Disable Enabled a Motion Alert Threshold Disabled Alert Severity Warning Tamper Alert Threshold rane AC din B Test Door Open n x E UN Voth Door Open Type Of Alert To Create Custom Alert a voth temperature test Disabled MENA ES B Alert Viewer ae LJ Actions seem I Thresholds Alert Filter Threshold Filter Asset Type Threshold Filter Location First Attribute First Attribute Value Operator First Attribute Value Second Attribute Second Attribute Value Operator Second Attribute Value Third Attribute Third Attribute Value Operator Third Attribute Value Threshold Delay t save Changes Profile admin A The door associated with Jollyville Patio Door has been opened A 2 Open Alerts Logout Link About Help Admin Console 130 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD 6 Tosee and complete the fields in the rest of the form scroll down D Asset Manager Thresholds e lt RF Code uu del B o Ies I n Su Dashboard M Filter A Tag Management 3 El Asset Not In Expected Location Thres amp Customization ort B Asset Offline Alert Threshoid TEST o6 Nus La Gauer Door Open Bb Jim s Te
283. shooting As with troubleshooting in general and more specifically with computer issues it is best to know exactly what actions were taken immediately prior to the error or issue starting Before contacting RF Code Support document as many details of the issue as you can Also as when troubleshooting any software application issues first attempt to isolate the issue to the specific application by eliminating other possible causes for the behavior you are seeing this encompasses knowing the hardware capabilities and utilization of the Asset Manager application server and database server as well as knowing the network bandwidth limits and use Standard performance monitoring means are always a good place to start especially if problems seem to be happening with multiple applications databases and or database instances Troubleshooting Resources RF Code Support Knowledge Base The RF Code Support Knowledge Base http support rfcode com is the best resource to use when you encounter an error Some errors are presented if you are trying to perform an action in the system that is not allowed Generally you will find Notes about performing various tasks to help you avoid this type of error but the Knowledge Base contains further explanation about the causes of these errors and what actions to take to configure and or use the Asset Manager system properly Two examples of this kind of error message and the knowledge base articles related to them ar
284. sing e Geist The satellite current monitoring family of PDUs e Emerson Liebert MPX PDUs shipped with an RPC 1000 module and Liebert MPH PDUs shipped with an embedded RPC 1000 e Schneider Electric APC APC 8xxx series PDUs running firmware version 6 0 9 or higher Using RF Code Sensor Tags with PDUs and CDUs The exact process of physically deploying and configuring PDUs and CDUs for use with Asset Manager depends on the make of the power device s you are using but essentially the process is the following 1 Physically connect the RF Code R170 sensor tag 2 Add the Tag Group and Sensor Tag Asset to Asset Manager 3 Modify a custom view so you can view power attributes for the PDU or CDU Installing PDU CDU Sensor Tags For instructions on the physical installation of RF Code R170 sensor tags for use with PDUs and CDUs refer to the Integration Guide and Tech Spec documents specific to your PDU or CDU These guides are available on the RF Code Support website at http support rfeode com customer portal articles 722910 Adding PDU CDU Sensor Tag Assets To add an R170 Sensor Tag and its associated PDU CDU asset perform the following steps 1 Inthe Admin Console go to Configuration gt Tag Groups and add the Tag Group NOTE Below are the Treatment Sub Codes and Tag Groups for specific R170 Sensor Tags PDU Manufacturer Group Code ServerTech STI STIRCK GSTRCK ENRRCK 194 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd
285. solved The first threshold attribute ID The first threshold attribute Name The second threshold attribute ID The second threshold attribute Name The third threshold attribute ID The third threshold attribute Name The ID of the alert treshold which triggered the alert The name of the threshold which triggered the alert The first threshold attribute operator The second threshold attribute operator The third threshold attribute operator The type of the threshold which triggered the alert The threshold value that is set for the first threshold attribute The threshold value that is set for the second threshold attribute The threshold value that is set for the third threshold attribute The current time 24 hour hour minute second The current time The current offset from GME positive negative digit plus 4 digits The URL to the alert views The current year The following macro will display an entity s description SOURCE SaDescription 246 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD The replaced values for all macros available to the action refer to the macro tables above with the exception of the following macros which only output a partial date or time DATE YEAR MONTH DAY TIME HOUR MINUTE SECOND MILLISECOND TIMEZONE_OFFSET NOTE A few macros only output a partial date or time these are DATE YEAR MONTH D
286. sset Type button The New Asset Type creation window will appear Tablet Tablet PC TABLET Enter a Name and a Description for the new Asset Type The ID will be automatically generated from the Name you enter but you can replace the ID if you want In this example above a new Asset Type named Tablet is being created as a child under the Parent Computer Asset Type Click the OK button to create the new Asset Type 4 7 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD gt The new Asset Type Tablet will now be displayed in the Asset Type hierarchy tree as a child of the Asset Type Computer NOTE By default there are no Asset Attributes associated with the new Tablet Asset Type Edit Attributes Tablet Name and Description Mame Tablet Description Field Order Required Dro dro e Inherited Attributes Name Category Field Order Inherited From Processor Computer Details 1000 Computer RAM Amount GB Computer Details 1100 Computer Storage or Disk Size GB Computer Details 1200 Computer Operating System Computer Details 1300 Computer MAC Address xx xx xx x Computer Details Computer NOTE For more information refer to the Asset Attributes and Asset Types section 48 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Viewing a
287. sset with a sub type of a setver desktop or laptop that will be tracked and managed within Asset Manager Asset Types are most typically arranged in a hierarchical tree that becomes more granular from top to bottom The Asset Types task is found in the Admin Console under Data Schema gt Asset Type and provides the following functions e Viewing the Asset Types hierarchy e Creating Asset Types e Editing Asset Types e Deleting Asset Types e Associating Asset Attributes with Asset Types e Configuration of Asset Type input form e Viewing sample Asset Type input form 44 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Managing Asset Types is a fairly complex task The default schema is usually sufficient for most deployments however it can also be customized Before beginning to customize your Asset Schema plan for the following Decide and document all of the different types of assets you wish to track with Asset Manager Create and document an Asset Type hierarchy from your list of types of assets Determine and document the Attribute Types information you wish to track about each type of asset For each Attribute Type determine the data type of the attribute string date number etc For each Attribute Type determine where in the Asset Type hierarchy it should be applied remembering that children of an Asset Type inherit Asset Attributes from their
288. ssword Confirm the HTTP login password e Additional Attributes Select the additional attributes you would like to publish for the event 98 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Configuration Settings for Logging Event Actions The following settings are available when configuring Logging Event Actions Log Configuration Log Entry Format JSON Destination Directory DATE Destination File Name DATE event log Additional Event Information Additional Attributes Name Asset Location Description Log Entry Format Select JSON or XML format Destination Directory Specify the destination directory you would like to use Macros can be used to specify the directory Destination File Name Specify the file name where alert information will be saved Macros can be used to specify the file name Additional Attributes Select the additional attributes you would like to publish for the event For SNMP V1 Trap Event Actions The configuration settings for SNMP V1 Event Actions are the following Event Action Configuration Hostname Port 162 Community String public Agent IP Address 0 0 0 0 Additional Event Information Additional Attributes Name Asset Location Description NOTE Asset Manager can send out bound SNMP traps alarms to an external third party management system however it does not
289. st Online Asset Alert Thresh Alert Filter e Access Control ete ID Jim s Test Temp Threshold Disabled 2 Low Battery Alert Threshold Disablec FA Maps Bl Motion Alert Threshold Disabled Threshold Filter Location Reports Graphs Kb Tamper Alert Threshold First Attribute Test Door Open FE Events B Voth Door Open First Attribute Value Operator a Alert Management a voth temperature test Disabled First Attribute Value Execution User Account Threshold Filter Asset Type B Alert Viewer Second Attribute E Actions Second Attribute Value Operator Thresholds Second Attribute Value Third Attribute Third Attribute Value Operator Third Attribute Value Threshold Delay Alert Actions Alert Actions Alert Messages Alert Start Message A custom alert condition has been detec Alert Resolve Message A custom alert condition was detected fi e A 2 Open Alerts Logout Link About Help Admin Console The most important fields of the threshold will be in the Alert Filter section e Online Status YES indicated by a check in the checkbox e Asset Tag the tag ID example of a tag ID LOCATE00008398 Below are the fields in the form that you will need to change from the defaults Basic Information Name user defined but probably best to include the name of the Asset or the tag ID or both Enabled Check the checkbox if it is not already checked A
290. t Acknowledged By Alert Message Alert Resolve Time Alert Start Time Alert State e Report Status Report Type Sensor Disconnected up Service Date d E Speed SSL Mode Start Time Startup Timestamp a Tag Capacity Used Tamper Temperature oy y 70 2j 3 pu pu pu L a af a un RFCOD 3 Under the Formatting heading click the Add button Tag Capacity Used Formatting Tamper Foreground Color Temperature Total Tags Tower ID Iransient Unassigned Tags Up Connection Enabled The Add Formatting dialog box will appear Add Formatting Foreground Color Background Color Operator Value iv OK x Cancel The Add Formatting box has four 4 fields e Foreground Color The color of the text itself e Background Color The color of the background of the cell e Operator Certain mathematical conditional or Boolean operands used to define along with the Value the scope of the desired formatting The possible operands depending on the Attribute are Equal to l NOT Equal to Greater than Less than Greater than OR Equal to lt Less than OR Equal to Contains Does Not Contain Starts With O O O O O O O O e Value Depending on the Attribute this can be a mathematical conditional or Boolean quantity 37 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 TeL 512 439 2200 F
291. t has nowt n Loon unk Abou 13 Double click the alert on the left side under Available and it will move to the right side under Selected Available Selected Fite Fite Email John Doe 14 Click the OK button The Action will then be available in the Alert Actions field 15 Click the Save Changes button 120 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD How to Set Up an Offline Asset Alert To set up an Offline Asset alert e mail for an existing asset tag perform the following steps 1 Inthe User Console click the Alert Management tab in the left column 2 Click the Thresholds tab 3 Inthe Asset Alert Threshold window choose Asset Offline Alert Threshold from the drop down menu m Asset Manager Thresholds gt RF Code A Brew co feou f d tan E Janis Tast Temp Th eshi a Low Battery Alert Thre x Always Actve LA Vobon Alert Thresnoks B Temper Alert Threshold Y User Required To Acknowledge Alert F Type Of Alert To Create Asset Offine Alert 4 Complete the relevant form fields Name Asset Offline Alert Threshold Threshold Filter Asset Type Asset would cover all tags if you prefer you can be more specific on the type Threshold Delay 60 or 120 seconds this can potentially cut down on false alarms by a missed beacon for instance 121 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Aust
292. tT mmm 3 Oeo Conan T Dean e Rie view TX oA gt a tarot Clem 2 of 2 deve thowe qe a Omm im ews EA Tepe Meatus Are Dpat Dem a LL te up FF Code Pandora C Geh a ip IF Code Sermons C Gert 4 RJ Mer ot Fact pers a ahura 231435 1011835 detiet Bech Mirror Ye de Y Code Lone Manager heri De sn Norrie EF Code Teg PPC 10 112 225 RF Code Marti E Tag Toaster DOD hard Dea Normal E Code T ag HUMP O DOS 19 18 365 Ri Code Marta E Tag Tester 04 Be roves Den Neonat WF Code fog HUMACIDODOOO fp Sheree Dmm herme 5 Cope Teg HUMAC IOO O hindi Rect Apoterce Foise Peers Lemon mend Cates mes SE Cote veg ODE Thay daga reset Ihe Lem ert Lorrie Mets os Me eto red demo jenes 754 torre sems Pod Sheed Dog Mal EF Case Tag OCEDORMONE hees Dene Icomos 8f Code tog PE CRCKODOLA Mesneme M Code Tag HUMBCIIONE fip inem Dn Meow 1 Code Teg PCKDOROD0000 Madet UF Code Marte E Tag Treatenent O47 Y Woes Dmm cemel I Code Tag VEDA 00000 shares Den 4 hve E Code lag TPR EOE Comme Pod Nermal Camara Pod OF RIL 8 oon EF Code Teg MECO b RI tme EF Code tandas Lrfande Ce ered Dmm Premi Af Code Tos MCEDO t m Li E g sce Lm O oret Dai serm gt haved Pegam Dec npton mts Deae rSestnerne or ewe TO deen eres m pregrem Wher ape Serer 111 08 215 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Troubleshooting Standard Approach to Trouble
293. tails Attributes Filter Screen Size Category Computer Details Field Order w Value Required E Static E Default Value 8 Assign a Field Order number The Field Order determines the placement of the Attribute on the input form 9 To place the new Attribute at the bottom of the list enter 1400 10 Leave the Value Required checkbox unchecked to allow entry of Assets with the Attribute unknown or unspecified NOTE Checking the box requires that when each time a Tablet asset is added to the system this information must be provided in order to save the asset information to the database 11 Leave the Static check box unchecked checked NOTE By leaving this checkbox unchecked the value in the Screen Size attribute is not changeable and is provided automatically If the box is checked then the end user must choose the default value from the Default Value entry box 12 Click the OK button to add the Asset Attribute to the Asset Type ris 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 13 Click the Save button 14 To verify that the Asset Attribute works correctly click View Sample Input Form Basic Information 0 Name 20 Asset Tag 30 Description 40 Asset Location 50 Expected Location s Computer Details 1400 Screen Size The Attribute Type Screen Size
294. te data from multiple readers The Zone Manager middleware location engine is not an end user application but was designed instead to be used in conjunction with an end user application that can benefit from consuming the data and information produced by the Zone Manager system It is important to note that the Zone Manager system is not designed to be a database of historical values or provide tag to asset association Zone Manager is designed to collect and track in real time the last known latest information about tag location status and sensor readings 13 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Since Zone Manager does not log historical data in a database it is extremely scalable with the ability to service thousands of RF Code readers while operating on a single dual core server system However Asset Manager stores data in a database and enables historical records of reader tag and asset data The Zone Manager middleware location engine allows for communication via a web or URL style API as well as a telnet style TCP IP connection The communications can be interactive command response as well as registration or subscription based to follow updates or changes The Zone Manager specification provides an extensive list of commands to fully control the RF Code readers and Zone Manager such as e Defining tag groups which tags to listen for e Addi
295. ted Location s Computer Inventory Assets will have Attributes specific to the Computer Asset Type Additionally the Server Asset Type will have the Attributes inherited from its Parent Asset Type and any others specific to the Server Asset Type 51 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Computer Details Processor RAM Amount GB Storage or Disk Size GB Operating System MAC Address XXIXXIXXIXXIXXIXX Server Form Factor System U Height System Criticality Serwer Use System Weight After completing the fields the new Asset Template will appear in the list of available templates m Asset Manager Asset Templates l Dashboard Filter 2 Tag Management E El Ct Server Asset Austin Data nu eS Customization Asset Templates 43g Views NOTE After creating a template when you click the New button you will be able to select the Asset Template that you created and the form will display the template input fields that are associated with that Asset Template NOTE As when creating new assets without using pre populated templates you will need to fill in the fields that are not pre populated with default input data and then click the Save Changes button Creating Folders for Asset Templates To create a folder for similar Asset Templates perform the following steps NOTE Folders can be created from and within many of t
296. ted statistical attributes will not be available until at least one update period has elapsed Adaptive Thresholds Adaptive Alert Thresholds are a powerful feature enabled by license key Adaptive thresholds enable mathematical comparatives using values and variables as part of the evaluation logic for thresholds Adaptive thresholds are user configurable allowing simple and complex logic to be expressed For example Adaptive Thresholds can compare an attribute to another attribute or compare an attribute to a mathematical formula involving additional attributes variable and constants values Furthermore Adaptive Thresholds can leverage any type of attribute in the system including calculated attributes and statistical attributes Some examples include An attribute compared to a constant such as Daily Average Temperature gt 80 degrees F This example threshold allows you to receive a warning of temperature trends before they become an issue An attribute compared to the addition of another attribute and a constant such as Temperature gt Monthly Average Temperature 15 degrees F The monthly average temperature of a facility may change depending on seasonal factors and still be within acceptable operating limits This threshold allows you to look for outliers of longer term trends An attribute compared to the addition of two other attributes such as Temperature gt Weekly Average Temperature Weekly Standard Deviati
297. tes to be selected The BACnet object type for numeric attributes is analog input The BACnet object type for Boolean attributes is binary input Select the attributes from your schema that you would like to publish using BACnet Asset Filter for Publishing BACnet Device Sensor Attributes e Filter Asset Type The Asset Filter is used to define the criteria for selecting which assets and their corresponding attributes will be published by the BACnet server and therefore made available to BACnet clients Select the asset type when you wish to limit the filter to e Filter Location Select a location that you would like to filter by e First Attribute Choose an attribute that you would like to filter by e First Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected e First Attribute Value Input the value that the first attribute should have for the filter e Second Attribute Choose a second attribute you would like to filter by e Second Attribute Value Operator Choose the operator for the attribute you have selected e Second Attribute Value Input the value that the second attribute should have for the filter BACnet Slave Object IDs For each attribute value to be published by the BACnet Slave Devices Asset Manager will automatically assign a unique BACnet object ID used by BACnet clients to query an attribute s current value The BACnet Slave Object IDs panel allows you to view the value of the BACn
298. that you desire to display in your custom dashboard For each widget you can configure the visual display features such as color borders title fonts etc When you have the widget settings configured click the Save Changes button to save the settings 170 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD Add as many or as few of the widgets that you desire to create your customized Dashboard KA M250 Reader State Marty s Reader Reader State Reader irdurmation Caocnnecisd Adtrsis Reader Type Eyam Rate Cranes A Evene Rate Channet gi Mamas Floor Channa Al fasias Miser Crannet D GPS Status mara ncodme com W5 115 oe 1 3 di rodeos lts rfcoge c W260 hs ta 3D ah 113 48m NOTE The table views of the dashboard can be customized to display or not display specific columns in the table views either through configuring with the widget settings or through the process described in the following To hide any of these columns click on the right side of the column where a menu arrow will appear Scroll down to the Columns item and uncheck any of the columns that you would like to hide You can also sort these columns in ascending or descending order alphabetically The preferences that you establish for the setup of your table views and dashboard configuration are automatically saved and will appear in the manner you have established each time you login 1 1 9229 W
299. the Asset Manager web console 253 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 TeL 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD For periodic maintenance all of the assets in the system can be exported as a backup file for an additional means of ensuring data integrity However regular backups of the entire Asset Manager database should be made regularly according to your standard database procedures For more information refer to the Backing Up and Restoring the Asset Manager Database section in the Appendix The import file type 1s either a CSV or a JSON file although it can be a compressed ZIP file as mentioned above that contains one of the two permitted import file types When files are imported Asset Manager must resolve dependencies for the objects in the import file 1 e if you are importing server assets then the Server Asset Type must be first be defined in Asset Manager or the import job will fail You can manually create these dependencies e g Asset Types Locations etc or you can import a schema file and or a configuration file that contains them When Asset Manager imports a file the import file is parsed and validated When an error is encountered one of two things can occur If the error is severe or general to the entire import file no items are imported into the system and the import process is terminated If an error is specific to the type attribute or asset being imported t
300. the browset s time zone and offset from GMT No adjustment is made to a timestamp value if the value is being updated via an Asset Manager API The Uniform or Universal Resource Locator which is the address of web pase When choosing the Type for an Attribute be sure to keep the following points in mind Floating Point or Integer The Units field appears if you chose this Asset Attribute Type This setting defines how the numerical value is stored on the server however it does not enforce how the value is displayed If a Unit is chosen the values will be converted and displayed according to the Units Display setting of the User account This is useful for expression attributes since the Units needs to match the Units of the original attribute For example if you create an Attribute for Max Temperature to be used in conjunction with an existing Temperature attribute then the Units setting should match 1 e if Units for the Temperature attribute is set to Celsius then ensure that the Units settings for Max Temperature is also set to Celsius In addition to the Units field Floating Point and Integer type Attributes also allow setting a Minimal Value and a Maximum Value Integer Floating Point String and URL All four of these Attribute types let you set a Regular Expression which can be used to validate user input NOTE For more information on regular expressions search the Internet abundant learning resources exist on t
301. the number of types and assets entities will still be reported and there will be no Download Errors button to click Import Jobs Start Time End Time Job Filename Job Status Job Message 2013 05 29 09 45 32 2013 05 28 09 45 32 config export 201211 COMPLETE Types 42 Assets 102 2013 05 29 09 31 07 2013 05 29 09 31 08 config export 201211 COMPLETE WITH ERRORS Types 42 Assets 101 256 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD The same is true with asset imports that complete successfully except that only assets will be imported and the number of successfully imported Assets will be reported in the Job Message column Import Jobs LO ose Submitter Start Time End Time Job Filename Job Status Job Message admin 2013 05 29 09 53 21 20 1305 29 09 53 22 assets export 2012111311282 COMPLETE Asse ts 55 admin 2013 05 29 09 45 32 2013 05 29 09 45 32 config export 20121113112800 COMPLETE Types 42 Assets 102 admin 2013 05 29 09 31 07 2013 05 29 09 31 08 config export 20121113112800 COMPLETE WITH ERRORS Types 42 Assets 101 When importing a schema e g the default V4 1 TI Comprehensive Schema a pop up window will show you what was imported Load Schema x 1 Configuration file successfully uploaded Number of attributes imported 137 Number of types imported 123 N OK NOTE For mor
302. the users configured in Asset Manager NOTE All LDAP users within Asset Manager must be within this search base Example Search Base Path cn Users de example de com 185 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD User Filter This is simply the object class for filtering the LDAP request for matching users Search Filter This field determines the field name for login id It is populated by default in Asset Manager If you are using Active Directory this field should not be altered User DN Attribute This field is used to configure Asset Manager with LDAP servers other than Active Directory Account Expiration Attribute This is set so that user accounts can be expired programmatically based on a date Do not change this field unless first contacting RF Code Support Email Attribute This defaults to mail and should not be changed Query Information for LDAP Groups Group Search Base ou Groups dc rfcode dc com Group Filter objectClass group Group DN Attribute distinquishedName User Membership Attribute memberOf Group Search Base In this field you will need to enter the path to the directory in the tree that contains the groups that match the names of the groups configured in Asset Manager Group Filter This 1s the object class for filtering the LDAP request for matching groups The defaults are setup for Active Directory but
303. their associated reference points is handled in this section Maps are viewed in the User Console build and managed here Map views which are created and managed in this section are filters and customizations for use in the User Console Maps that allow for different attributes to be overlaid on the Maps This section is where Summary Assets are created and applied to their respective locations This is where attributes are managed for use with assets also Asset Attributes Status Attributes Calculated Asset Attributes Asset Types Custom Attribute Types Schema Import nn MERE NENNEN LDAP Server User Audit Trail could be considered custom properties fields to be applied to assets that can be entered or modified Status attributes are generally considered to be attributes that are native to a tag that can be changed from the state of one of the sensors on that tag e g tamper motion temperature This section allows for creation and modification of more advanced attributes which can contain formulas and automated calculations Creating Asset Types and applying changing the different attributes that apply to assets is done in this section More advanced dependency based attributes can be created and modified in this section such as temperature sensor profiles Pre defined schemas are loaded in this section which change the Asset Types and various Attributes populated in the system Us
304. tics with values This distillation of objects and relationships accounts for physical objects that are managed through physical structures as well as the physical conditions of the environments in which the physical objects exist Asset Manager provides a dynamic map of the territory for which you are responsible This map will tell you where your assets are how they are doing and if they move then you ll know that they did and you ll know where they went if they are still in your territory If an asset does leave your territory then you ll know where it was prior to departure Configuring and Using Asset Manager After installing Asset Manager the first things you need to do are basic configurations and these are clearly shown in the Dashboard under System Status in the System Configuration window pane The five 5 preliminary components that you need to configure are a Database a Zone Manager a Reader Tag Groups and a basic License Key The Asset Manager Database and a local Zone Manager will already be configured if you chose the local Zone Manager option and the SQL Server Express options during the installation process and you will know they have been configured because these Components will appear with green check marks next to them in the Configured column E il Asset Manager Administration Dashboard qe fe 7 TIS Ie TI B Users Online System Configuration S Dashboard Filter 3 Administrator 1 Logged In Component Conf
305. time all sensor and location data changes automatically as soon as Asset Manager receives any updates from the tags A user can select the Pause Updates button to stop the view from being updated dynamically if a current snapshot of asset state is needed The Resume button will be presented to enable automatic updating again The dynamic filter allows users to narrow the list of assets objects by Type Location Status Attribute Attribute Value or any combination of these There are four ways to manipulate assets within the Access Control panel Edit Groups Add Groups Remove Groups and View functions 176 512 439 2199 www rfcode com j229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 5C vl 4 D A 1 Lu A C Uu c J O Sy J 4 T l I i PO e T J RECOD To enable a Group and the Users within 1t to have access to a specific asset and information about it perform the following steps 1 Inthe User Console go to Access Control and click the Access Control sub task amp Asset Manager Access Control Booimeris fo O Ascrouns lt edt croup ES mem i Name Asset Type Description Allowed User Groups Differential Pressure ee Differential Pressure Data Center CRAC Unit 2 Click the Edit Groups button You will be prompted with the Group Membership window Attribute ee al ll Asset Type Description Allowed User Groups
306. tin Data Center Create roer cance 3 Type ina name for the folder and then click the Create Folder button The folder will now appear in the Data tree on the left Fiter a 3 3 Test Folder 3 jAustin Data Center Austin Readers Online NOTE To edit the folder click the Edit Folder button The Edit Folder Box will appear here you can edit the name of the folder and then click the Save Folder button to save the changes NOTE To delete a folder click the Delete Folder button and the folder will disappear from the data tree 4 Click the New button to create a graph 5 Inthe Graph Editor area select a graph template from the list of available templates 147 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD The Graph editor screen will appear Configuring Graph Template Definitions The Graphs editor is divided into the follow sections Basic Information Time Schedule Actions Filter Post Condition Columns and Appearance System Graph Basic Information Name Create output only if data exists Time Time Type Schedule Schedule Basic Information Name This section lets you name the graph Each graph must have a unique name but the name can be as long as necessary so that you can identify it precisely 148 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode
307. ting or adding an Asset Attribute to an Asset Type 1 Navigate to Admin Console gt Data Schema gt Asset Types 2 Click the View Sample Input Form button and the input form will appear Inventory Basic Information 0 Name 20 Asset Tag 30 Description 40 Asset Location 50 Expected Location s 3 In the example above you are using the Asset Type Tablet The Asset Attribute that we wish to add is the Screen Size and this Asset Attribute already exists and is also used by the Asset Types Laptop and Monitors Looking at the Figure above the desired position of the Asset Attribute Screen Size is in the section titled Computer Details at the bottom of the list Notice the numbers that are in parentheses to the left of the attribute labels These numbers are Field Order numbers and they are used to determine the order or positioning of the Asset Types that are added to an Asset Type Asset Manager orders Asset Attributes in an ascending order smallest to largest from top to bottom In this example in order to make Screen Size appear at the bottom of the list it needs to have a field order number ereater than 1300 TIP The Field Order numbers are arbitrary numbers that you assign Therefore do not use consecutive numbers as that leaves no extra space to add additional Asset Attributes in the future should the need arise A best practice is to skip about
308. tions criteria are available Relative Time You can configure Time to show conditions for Now 6 Hours Ago 12 Hours Ago 1 day ago 7 days ago 30 days ago 60 days ago or 90 days ago Specific Time An example of a specific time for a repott is 1 00pm on 11 14 2008 Relative Time Range An example of a relative time range is Last Hour Last 6 Hours Last 12 Hours Last Day Last 7 Days Last 30 Days Last 60 Days or Last 90 Days Specific Time Range An example of a specific time range for a report is 1 00pm on 11 14 2008 to 8 00pm on 11 14 2008 Calendar Time Range You can configure Time to show conditions for Thzs Day This Week or This Month Lead In Timestamps Include attribute state changes if they occurred before the specified report time For example if you are generating a report to show offline assets during a specific week and some of the assets went from online to offline before the report start time then that information will be included in the report If you leave this box unchecked the report will only show the state of the attribute at the specified start time 139 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Report Schedule The Report Schedule section allows the report to be configured to run on a scheduled basis Scheduled reports can be run on a daily weekly or monthly basis When the Report schedule ellipsis button is
309. tive overhead because you must then manually enable all new assets and or sensors that are added to a location so that they can be viewed by the necessary Group s Advanced Asset Security Advanced Asset Security lets you give certain Users the ability to restrict Asset views to different Groups of Users based upon Location To enable Advanced Asset Security perform the following steps 1 Inthe Admin Console go to Configuration gt Server 2 Check the Enable Advanced Asset Security checkbox 3 Click Save Changes You will be prompted with a System Restart pop up window System Restart A For security configuration changes to take effect a server restart is required 4 Click the Save amp Restart button The Asset Manager service will restart 5 Log back into Asset Manager 6 Inthe Admin Console go to Locations Rules Maps gt Locations amp Rules 7 Highlight the root Location in the tree 178 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFECOD 8 Click to check and enable the Restrictable checkbox ev Asset Manager Administration Locations amp Rules a Edit Locatioec Location Name and Description des Map Configuration i wap Views WS Locahen to Asset Assocation 9 Click the Save Changes button Asset Links Asset Links simplify and streamline the asset navigation and browsing process Asset Links are system administ
310. to all things to which the Group has access NOTE Permissions are cumulative Users have access to anything in Asset Manager that is permitted by any Group to which that User has been assigned This means that if a User belongs to two Groups and one Group has access to certain parts of the system that are prohibited to the other group to which the User belongs then the User will have permission to see those things i e do not add a User to a Group that provides an access level greater than you intend for that User Access Control To further restrict visibility of assets and sensors you can go to the Access Control feature to limit what assets sensors are seen by different Groups Access Control allows users who are assigned an Asset Manager or Asset Editor Role to change User access to an asset or sensor after it is created Access Control allows Asset Managers and Asset Editors to assign Groups to Assets and to other User Console objects in the system such as Reports Graphs Alerts Thresholds Views Maps etc NOTE Access Control does not appear in the task list for Asset Managers or Asset Editors if Security is enabled Also if an Asset Manager ot an Asset Editor is a member of only one Group and that Group cannot assign Assets to the Everyone Group the default group where its member can see all assets sensors then neither does the Access Control task appear for them Information presented in Access Control is reported in real
311. to following RF Code Knowledge Base article for more information about Group Codes and Treatment Codes http support rfcode com customer portal articles 723973 a Asset Manager Administration Tag Groups x S Dashboard Filter Tag Group E SA i Cel a Treatment 04D Tag Group Configuration dal t Treatment 04E Tag Group Database ATTRA Treatment 04F Tag Group T License Keys Treatment 04H Tag Group 1 SMTP Server Treatment 041 Tag Group 5 Import Configuration Treatment 04 Tag Group E Export Configuration Treatment 04L Tag Group E A Tn AA E A E After clicking the Treatment Code the right pane will fill with Tag Group configuration fields ag Gage Treatment 04 Tag Group Basic ntormatos Marne Group Code RFCRCX Location Update Delay 0 S seconds Enhanced Payload Verty IFSUPPORTED ignored Attributes Tag Age Out Tene Locgtion Match Confidence Boost Location Match Boost Time gt seconds De fn f Access User Groups For New Tags In the Basic Information section the Group Code e g RFCRCK will be pre populated NOTE Each Tag Group can have multiple Group Codes so you may need to specify a different Group Code For more information refer to the RF Code Tag Group Codes IDs and Treatment Codes section in the Appendix In the Name field type the Group Code again unless you need to name the Tag Group something different Click the Save Changes button at the bo
312. to you dynamically e Asset Location This field is used to tell Asset Manager where the tag will reside physically Chose the appropriate location of the tag from the Location Hierarchy e g the specific rack where a temperature sensor asset is physically installed e Lock Location Check this box if the asset is not a mobile asset e g an environmental sensor that should not be moved after deploying it 38 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RI COD NOTE The rest of the fields are optional but when you are comfortable with Asset Manager then you can configure them to enter and thus monitor a great deal about your assets and your environment p e Asset Manager Manage Tags O E H y Si Dashboard 2 Tag Management Manage Tags Tag Summary L2 Customization o6 Assets e Access Control Edit Server Basic firian Name Asset Tag Description Asset Location Lock Location Expected Location s Purchase Terms Purchase Date Asset Age months Purchase Value Server 1 Rack 2B Row 1 LOCATE00195913 Dell Blade RFC Rack 1 y lt RF Code Service Date v 2012 11 28 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 2012 11 14 bi Maps Asset Purchase Order document Select file 201
313. tons on top of the screen NOTE The Excel screenshot below shows a CSV formatted mapping of this particular Modbus integration EY A va VAR SR oret muro Home inasin fagelm out formulss Ost Review View UM oA A ow ar General E EU E eei a d 1 D A FEDER 3 S M 42 tenens Form Cen ton Find Formatting ar Table Styles 13 Format uh fater Select gt taxmon Asset Type Rack Temperature amp Humidity Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor 2 Row 1 Temp Humidity 3 Rack 3 Bottom Front Temperature 4 Rack Front Temperature 5 Rack 2 Bottom Front Temperature 6 Rack 5 Bottom Front Temperature 7 Rack 4 Bottom Front Temperature 8 Rack 2 Top Front Temperature 9 Row 2 Temp Humidity 10 Rack 5 Top Front Temperature 11 Rack 4 Top Front Temperature 12 Rack 3 Top Front Temperature Room Temperature amp Humidity Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor Rack Temperature Sensor Styles Sei tareng s D E F Modbus index SlavelD Temperature Address 40001 40003 40005 40007 40009 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 q i 5 i 6 i 7 1 8 1 El 1 1 et o Upon completion and exporting of this mapping a BMS data consuming system should now be able to pull query information using Modbus TCP from the Asset Manager
314. tory Select the macro s for the directory to publish to e Destination File Name Specify the file name where alert information will be saved NOTE Macros can be used to specify file names For more information on Macros refer to the Macros section 102 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcoc om RF COD Configuring SNMP V1 Trap Alert Actions e Hostname Specify the hostname of the server the trap will be sent to e Port Select the port that the destination server is listening on by default this is 162 e Community String Authentication of clients is performed by a community string in effect a type of password which is transmitted in clear text Input the community string for your server by default this is set to public e Agent IP Address Input the IP address of your agent a network management software module that resides on a managed device e Additional Attributes Select any additional attributes you would like to publish for the alert NOTE For more about SNMP trap formatting refer to the SNMP Trap Formatting section Configuring SNMP V3 Alert Actions e Transport Protocol Select UDP or TCP e Hostname Input the IP address of your server e Port Select the Port over which to communicate with the server by default this is 162 e Type of Notification Select TRAP or INFORM e Authentication User ID Password Confirm Enter
315. ts and Graphs In the Admin Console the Reports Graphs task lets you produce tabular and summary Reports about Readers Zone Managers and Users that are established and managed by Asset Manager Tabular reports are simply reports in spreadsheet format with columns of attributes and rows of data while summary reports are counts and simple aggregates of data such as the number of server assets or the average daily temperature in a given location In addition to reports you can also create graphical representations Graphs of reader states reader noise levels Zone Managers states asset conditions and environmental conditions In the User Console assets being managed and monitored by the system can be graphed and reported on le Asset Manager Administration Manage Reports ea v Y CH Dashboard Configuration E Integration w Locations Rules Maps Data Schema 8 security A Reports Graphs la Manage Reports e Reports l Manage Graphs E Graphs a Actions i3 BIRT Templates Reports and Graphs Overview The Reports Graphs task provides the following six sub tasks configuration areas Manage Reports This configuration area lets you create report criteria and then run reports either ad hoc or based on criteria you have defined Once a report is created and executed the result of the report is available on the Reports sub task Reports This configuration area lets you view the pro
316. ttom of the window 35 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Assets Overview of Assets Assets are the physical objects and the environment that are tracked and or monitored with Asset Manager Assets can range from servers to hospital equipment to people and others but they can also simply be represent RF Code tags themselves in the case of RF Code environmental sensors Assets are classified as Asset Types Assets have Attributes Assets can be assigned to Locations and Expected Locations There is also a special class of Assets called Summary Assets that are explained in great detail in the Summary Asset section Managing Assets In order to efficiently and effectively manage your assets and monitor your environment within Asset Manager you will need to plan and define a location hierarchy in which your assets exist Before deploying Asset Manager in your production environment you will need to have a good understanding of the logical Locations that are used in Asset Manager however you can use the pre defined location hierarchy when you add the first few assets to the system while you ate learning how to use it Locations ate described in detail in the Location and Location Hierarchy section In addition to needing a properly structured Location Hierarchy you will also want to extend the schema that is initially available within Asset Manager The
317. ual data and as such it cannot be represented as JSON or CSV data The same is true when exporting schema The configuration settings exported within the ZIP file will still be exported as either a JSON or CSV file B Asset Manager Administration Export Configuration w e Export System Configuration SMTP Configuration S Dashboard 9 Zone Managers Readers amp Tag Groups Configuration Locations amp Rules 3 Database Users T License Keys Alert Actions amp Alert Thresholds SMTP Server 4 Import Configuration Export Configuration amp Tag Groups lig Zone Managers Maps Map Views Ly Zone Manager Status Reports Graphs amp Actions kal Readers Event Triggers amp Actions hal Reader Firmware Integration k Reader Status Binary Data w GPS Format Serial Devices gt IJ server Asset Templates amp Views Dashboards Folders a s E SI S E SI SI SI E SI ISI E Export Configuration Export Schema Binary Data s Integration A Format e Locations Rules Maps E Export Schema As noted in the section on Exporting Assets users can export a basic asset file to use as a template with Microsoft Excel or another spreadsheet program in order to populate that CSV file with assets and asset attributes and then import those assets attributes and tags back into the Asset Manager database as opposed to entering every asset manually one at a time within
318. uch as humidity fluid detection and or open door States 12 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD How to Set Up an Asset Online Alert To set up a threshold alert to generate a notification when an asset comes online perform the following steps 1 Navigate to User Console gt Alert Management gt Thresholds p Asset Manager Thresholds Filter R Asset Not In Expected Location Thres LA Asset Offline Alert Threshold TEST a Gauer Door Open a Jim s Test Online Asset Alert Thresh LA Jim s Test Temp Threshold Disabled Low Battery Alert Threshold Disablec a Motion Alert Threshold Disabled B Tamper Alert Threshold Test Door Open Voth Door Open a voth temperature test Disabled ae a Alert Viewer E Actions Thresholds 2 Click the New button p Asset Manager Thresholds 9 Filter a Asset Not In Expected Location Thres R Asset Offline Alert Threshold TEST a Gauer Door Open a Jim s Test Online Asset Alert Thresh LA Jim s Test Temp Threshold Disabled a Low Battery Alert Threshold Disablec a Motion Alert Threshold Disabled R Reports Graphs B R Tamper Alert Threshold ic p Test Door Open ES Events Voth Door Open b a voth temperature test Disabled Alert Management pn B Alert Viewer E Actions Thresholds 128 9229 Waterfor
319. ue ID number and a short status indication e g normal location sensor status and or low battery condition e The RF message is a sequence of up to 40 short pulses where each pulse lasts only 27 micro seconds Over a 24 hour period a 10 second beacon tag will broadcast its status message 8 640 times e 8 640 messages equals approximately 346 000 individual pulses per day Therefore total transmission on time equals 27 micro seconds x 346 000 9 34 seconds per day Prerequisite Reader Configuration In order to use Asset Manager you will need to have at least one RF Code reader configured and one or more RF Code Active RFID tags within range of the reader To configure a reader using the Reader Configuration Utility RCU refer to the Reader Configuration with the Reader Configuration Utility section in the Appendix Additionally you can test reader reception of tag beacons using the reader web console this process 1s described in the Reader Configuration with Reader Web Console section in the Appendix Later after installing Asset Manager you will add one or more readers and one or more Tag Group Codes within Asset Manager 12 3758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 5 REF COD RF Code Zone Manager Zone Manager is a real time location engine designed specifically for use with RF Code s asset tracking and wire free environmental
320. ues from the entity that triggered the Event or Alert To do this specify the macro name SOURCE followed by a period followed by the ID of the attribute that you wish to display These macros can also be used to generate a context sensitive email address so that the appropriate contact can be notified in response to alerts or events Below is a table of the macros available for use with Event Email Actions 244 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com FILTER_LOCATION FILTER_TYPE HOUR ID MILLISECOND MINUTE MONTH SECOND SOURCE attribute SOURCE ID SOURCE TRIGGER VAL SOURCE TRIGGER VAL SOURCE TRIGGER VAL TIME TIMESTAMP TIMEZONE OFFSET TRIGGER ATTRIBUTE1 ID TRIGGER ATTRIBUTE TRIGGER ATTRIBUTE ID TRIGGER ATTRIBUTEJ TRIGGER ATTRIBUTE3 ID TRIGGER ATTRIBUTE3 TRIGGER ID TRIGGER OPERATOR1 TRIGGER OPERATOR2 TRIGGER OPERATOR3 TRIGGER TYPE TRIGGER VALUE TRIGGER VALUE2 TRIGGER VALUE3 YEAR The current date year month day The current day of the month 2 digits The threshold s filter location The thresholds filter asset type The current hour of the day 2 digits 24 hour Event ID The current milliseconds of the second 3 digits The current minute of the hour 2 digits The current month 2 digits January 01 The current second of the minute 2 digits Value of an att
321. umber will be 636 unless you have changed the default setting Use SSL Check this box if you have a signed certificate installed on your server This will cause Asset Manager to communicate with yout LDAP server using SSL Authentication Settings Bind User Specify the User account who will perform bind requests to the LDAP server To do so you will need to enter information pertinent to tree path Authentication Settings Bind User cn FirstMame LastMame cn Users dc Bind Password ITTTITITTITIITII Confirm Password ITTTITITTITIITII 194 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD NOTE Binding is the step where the LDAP server authenticates the client and if the client is successfully authenticated allows the client access to the LDAP server based on that client s privileges The screenshot below shows a User in an LDAP AD tree fie Edit Favorites Search Compare History Help eats Fis s r Oi Dan Horowitz CN Uisers DC rfeode DC com ewe rfcode com Par rfcode com Vaue s ox 7 i J 4 26 2013 8 21 35 AM D Dan Horositz 2 Attribute ajani ores badrasswordT me ajbadrr ount ajo 8 codePage 8 count yCode a ospieyiiare a singshediane a SCoreropagationData 9 Dan Horowitz CN Dan Horowitz CN Uisers DC rfcode 2C com 1 1 1601 12 009 AM Wo op po ph po Rodeo eR NOTE The Bin
322. up If you must run Asset Manager on potts lower than 1024 then you will need to use a special procedure in order to run the application as a non root uset 21 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Executing the install In order to install the software use the rpm i command and then supply the file name for the rpm to be installed The install must be executed at a root privilege level either by being root or by using sudo rpm i rfcode am zonemanager version j x86 64 rbm OR rpm i rfcode assetmanager version j x86 64 rbm Service Notes Once the service has been installed it is managed through common operating system tools When the system restarts there is no need to interactively start or stop the service manually If however starting or stopping the service is desired the following commands are useful service stop rfcassetmanager service start rfcassetmanager Configuring Linux Firewall Settings The following ports will need to be allowed through the firewall if their use is desired The installer will not create these exceptions so if the operating system firewall is turned on this will need to be manually accomplished Port Number Description Notes 6580 HTIP interface HTTP or HTTPS access is needed 6581 HTTPS interface HTTP or HTTPS access is needed 6503 Reader Up Connect Port Needed when using reader up connect feature 650
323. uration sub task by double clicking on the Zone Managers line in this pane Included in default dashboard This widget pane displays a summary of Readers that have been configured for use in the Asset Manager system It lists the number of Readers and indicates their status whether they are online or offline The Reader Status Configuration sub task can be accessed by double clicking on the Reader line in this pane Included in default dashboard TE i E Alerts Past Week This widget pane displays a bar graph of the number of alerts that have occurred for each day during the last week time period Asset Grid This widget pane displays one or more attribute values in a grid table Rar Chan her pane displays a single attribute value for one or more assets in a bar chart graphic Dial This widget pane displays a single attribute value for one asset in a dial format The dial allows for a Offline Readers upper and lower boundaty settings with a pointer indicating the current reading level on the dial This widget pane 1s displays a single attribute value for one or more assets in a line graph format Graph The graph s time period and refresh interval are configurable and the graph is up dated dynamically This widget pane displays a single attribute value for one asset in a horizontal bar format The bar Horizontal Bar widget allows for upper and lower bounds configuration to be set LCD Display This widget pane displays a single
324. ustin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RF COD Maps Overview of Maps Maps ate created and edited under Location Rules Maps gt Map Configuration Here you can create a visual representation of part or all of the Location Hierarchy and you can provide a summary of information about assets that are assigned to specific locations in the tree Each location can have one or more maps associated with it You can also create various Map Families which are categorizations of maps One example of a Map family is Geographical which can contain geographical illustrations of specific locations in the tree Other examples include satellite maps blueprints surveys and CAD drawings Maps images can be of any size or format including BMP PNG JPG GIF SVG etc Maps can have various Hot Spots configured to show upon them Hot Spots are used to specify a location on the map and also to provide a summary of information regarding assets assigned to specific locations so you can provide a quick and easily comprehensible visual representation of your assets and environmental conditions Two useful features of Hot Spots are Hover Attributes and Hot Spot Links and one useful feature of Maps in general is the ability to use Map Attributes Hover Attributes can be assigned to any Hot Spot and are easily configured to display in further detail any number and manner of attributes for any map Hot Spot Links let you link maps together l
325. utes Calculated Asset Attributes o6 Asset Types Custom Attribute Types Filter E E 3 o6 Asset 3 o6 Inventory E o6 IT Equipment 3 o6 Computer o6 Desktop o6 Laptop o6 Server db Tablet o6 Monitor o6 CRT Monitor db LCD Monitor o6 LED Monitor pt Schema Import 2 The Asset Editor area shows the details of the Asset Type and is divided into three areas e Name and Description This area shows the Name Description ID and Parent of the selected Asset Type e Attributes This area shows the attributes that are associated to the Asset Type There are controls for managing the Attribute Types that are associated to the Asset Type as well e Inherited Attributes This area shows all of the Asset Attributes that the Asset Type has inherited from its parents Inherited Asset Attributes can only be viewed here To manage an inherited Asset Attribute you must edit the Asset Type with which it is associated 46 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RFCOD Adding New Asset Types The following steps will guide you through creating a new Asset Type 1 Navigate in the Admin Console to Data Schema gt Asset Type Select a parent Asset Type from the Asset Type tree for the new Asset Type you wish to create NOTE All Asset Types must have a parent but there can be as many Asset Type children in your hierarchy as you need Click the New A
326. values e Tag Age Out Time is the number of seconds since the last successful message read from a tag before the tag is considered lost The allowed values range from 10 to 32767 The default value is 60 seconds If the value is set to 0 the tag timeout is infinite A tag that has not been seen by a reader for n seconds will be reported as not present e Tag Age Out Time Channel A B This field functions the same as Tag Age Out Time but is Channel specific e Tag Age Out Time Reader Offline Is the length of time to keep tags in the system if a reader goes offline n seconds after a reader goes offline the tags that had been reported by this reader will be reported as offline e Tag Age In Count is an optional parameter used to tell the reader to not report messages from a tag until n messages have been received from that tag This allows the option of ignoring tags that may appear for a short period 231 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com REF COD of time for example due to a tag isolation box being opened for a few seconds e Channel Bias Channel A B This setting allows for a compensation offset value to be added when different gain antennae are used e Report Tag Controller Events Checkbox Enables a reader to report events that occur when using the RF Code Tag Controller e Join Reader Channels Checkbox Enable
327. ves do not require greater computing resources the Calculated Attributes associated to the Summary Assets do The default schemas have Calculated Attributes associated with the Summary Assets therefore using a large number of Calculated Attributes can result in higher CPU utilization and database activity on the Asset Manager server When needed you can always create new Summary Assets Finally as with any other Assets you can use all of the following with Summary Assets Table Views Map Views Dashboard Views Alerts amp Thresholds Reporting and Graphing 62 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Associating Locations to Assets You can associate a location to a new asset or to an existing asset Follow the first three steps below and then one of the two subsequent sections depending on whether you are associating the location to a new asset ot to an existing asset To associate a Location to an Asset perform the following steps 1 Inthe Administrator Console navigate to Locations Rules Maps gt Location to Asset Association 2 From the list of locations in the hierarchy select the location that you want to associate to an asset Qs Sensor Manager Administration Location to Asset Association lt e Ma o Bookmarks v 2 Associate Location To Asset d EditAssociated Asse RemoveAssetAssociation J
328. w report definition Configuring Report Template Definitions Configuring report definitions is essentially the same in both the Admin Console and in the User Console with the exception that the User Console offers an additional Security configuration option that lets the Report creator define an Execution User Account Otherwise the configuration fields are the same for both although the Attribute options for Filters Conditions and Columns differ depending upon what type of report is chosen 1 e you can display Temperature in a Temperature Report defined in the User Console but not in a Reader Noise Report defined in the Admin Console for obvious reasons The report editor is divided into the following sections Basic Information Security Time Schedule Actions Filter Post Condition Exception Condition Columns The first five 5 sections available when configuring Report Definitions are shown Basic Information Name BIRT Asset Template Create output only if data exists security Execution User Account Time Lead In Timestamps Time Type Schedule Schedule Enable Schedule Actions Action Format Report Graph Actions Basic Information The Basic Information section lets you name the report Each report must have a unique name The name can be long and have spaces Long names are fine especially since each Report name should give enough information to let you and others know exactly what kind of
329. w rfcode com 3229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 50C OO Austin TX REF COD To delete an Asset Attribute perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Admin Console gt Data Schema gt Asset Attributes and the asset attributes task pane will appear on the right The asset attributes task pane is divided into two sections which are the list of defined asset attributes on the left and the asset attribute editor on the right Add and Delete buttons are displayed above the task pane 2 Select the appropriate asset attribute from the list of asset attributes 3 Click the Delete button to delete the asset attribute If the asset attribute is in use by one or more Asset Types the asset attribute cannot be deleted instead remove the association of the asset to the attribute 71 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com ho REF COD Adding Asset Attributes to Asset Types Adding an Asset Attribute to an Asset Type involves a little forethought and planning First you need to have already created the Asset Attribute If you have not already done so refer to the Asset Attribute section Second you need to know where on the Asset Type input form the new Asset Attribute will appear To help you determine the best placement of the new Attribute you can click the View the Sample Input Form button to view the form The following steps will guide you through associa
330. wer Monitoring e Screen Size e Server Form Factor eo Server Use e Storage or Disk Size GB e System Criticality e System U Height e System Weight e Temperature Sensor Application e Title e Volumetric Air Flow Rate e Warranty Term months The schema contains the following Calculated Asset Attributes e Any Door Open e lt Any Doors Last Opened e Any Fluid Detected e Any Sensor Offline e Any Warranty Expired e Asset Age months 4 y MN 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 c AAT 59D PA Es y m gt ADM 210 Cf 9 WAYAY 434 2e2UU ax 512 439 2199 WWW 240 r code com REF COD e Asset Count e Available Rack Weight Capacity Yo e Available U Space Capacity Yo e Average Asset Age months e Average Asset Value e Average Exhaust Temperature e Average Humidity e Average Intake Humidity e Average Intake Temperature e Average Return Humidity e Average Return Temperature e Average Return Temperature Weighted e Average Temperature e Average Temperature Delta e Calculated Max Alert Severity e Cold Aisle Containment Door Link Hidden e Cold Aisle Door Open e CRAC Return Humidity Link e CRAC Return Temp Link e CRAC Supply Humidity Link e CRACSupply Temp Link e CRAC Temperature e Door Counter e Door Opens per Day e Equipment Active Power e Equipment Apparent Power e Exhaust Humidity Link Hidden e Exhaust Temp Link Hidd
331. ws will also determine column ordering of the attributes being displayed Creating Asset Templates To create a new Asset Template perform the following steps 1 2 Go to Customization gt Asset Templates and click the New button Oi Asset Manager Asset Templates Bookmarks Filter s 5 A Tag Management E Customization Asset Templates dg Views Type in a name and description in the Template ID and Description fields 50 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RIF COD 3 Select the asset type from the Template Asset Type pull down list Template Settings emplate ID Server Asset Austin Data Center emplate Description Server Asset Austin Data Center empate Asset Type berver Asset y Basic Informatic E Inventory Name zi di IT Equipment Asset Tag c di Network Equipment c di Other IT Equipment 8 di Printer c ly Office Equipment Purchase E di Other Equipment Bl Asset Ane H di Person NOTE The list will be populated with the asset types that the Asset Manager administrator has defined 4 Complete the fields in the Basic Information section and any others that appear Unless defined and configured otherwise the first fields in the Basic Information section are the same for all Inventory Assets Basic Information Name Asset Tag Description Asset Location Austin Lock Location Expec
332. xception that configuring Graph definitions in the User Console offers an additional Security configuration option that lets the Graph creator define an Execution User Account Otherwise the configuration fields are the same for both although the Attribute options for Filters Conditions and Columns differ depending upon what type of Graph is chosen Graphs in Asset Manager are produced in a linear style with the axis determined by the criteria you specify 146 9229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com RECOD Creating Graph Template Definitions To create a new graph definition perform the following steps 1 Navigate to Reports Graphs gt Manage Graphs The Manage Graphs task pane will appear on the right e Asset Manager Administration Manage Graphs ps Ao ME ov fos aer i eee faro 9 E Dashboard 8 Configuration Z Integration System Graph gy Locations Rules Maps le Manage Sesorts Reports L Manage Graphe Orapha The Manage Graphs task pane is divided into two sections the list of defined graphs and Folders if they have been created on the left and the Graphs Editor on the right At the top of the task pane are several buttons New Copy Delete Run Graph and Run and View Graph 2 To create a folder click the New Folder button The New Folder dialog box will appear New Folder Please enter folder name Aus
333. y o6 Summary Location Adding Assets Individually From the User Console configure a few assets or sensors as assets in order to get started Later you can then use the Export and Import features of Asset Manager in addition to a spreadsheet program e g Microsoft Excel to add a large number of assets and or sensor tags as assets all at once along with the attributes that are associated with all of those assets Using the Export Import functionality will spare you the time and effort of having to enter each asset individually within Asset Manager In order to view information about your assets or to collect data from your sensors you must first assign a tag to an Asset or as an Asset 36 3229 Waterford Centre Blvd Suite 500 Austin TX 78758 Tel 512 439 2200 Fax 512 439 2199 www rfcode com al us RECOD To add a new asset to Asset Manager perform the following steps 1 In User Console browse to Tag Management gt Manage Tags 2 Select the tag s under the Import Detected Tags column and click the Add Selected Tag s button or simply click Add All Tags This will move the tags to the Unassigned Tags column 3 Inthe Unassigned Tags column right click on the tag to be assigned in the far right column and then select New Asset wu Asset Manager Manage Tags Search lt RF Code e ias s SQ Remove 2 Remove Aa Asset Tog Service Date 2012 11 28 2012 11 14 2912 11 14 2912 11 14 2012 11 14 2

Asset Manager

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents